]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
Automatic date update in version.in
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
b8871f35
L
1095@item common
1096Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1097link.
1098
cd6d6c15 1099@item defs
560e09e9 1100Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1101shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1102
6aa29e7b
JJ
1103@item execstack
1104Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1105
b039ef04
L
1106@item global
1107This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1108the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1109of subsequently loaded libraries.
1110
cd6d6c15
NC
1111@item initfirst
1112This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1113It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1114before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1115the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1116the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1117objects.
1118
1119@item interpose
1120Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1121but the primary executable.
1122
5fa222e4
AM
1123@item lazy
1124When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1125dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1126the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1127Lazy binding is the default.
1128
cd6d6c15
NC
1129@item loadfltr
1130Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1131runtime.
1132
1133@item muldefs
1134Allows multiple definitions.
1135
1136@item nocombreloc
1137Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1138
b8871f35
L
1139@item nocommon
1140Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1141link.
1142
cd6d6c15 1143@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1144Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1145defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1146
1147@item nodefaultlib
1148Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1149ignore any default library search paths.
1150
1151@item nodelete
1152Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1153
1154@item nodlopen
1155Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1156
1157@item nodump
1158Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1159
6aa29e7b
JJ
1160@item noexecstack
1161Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1162
8dfef1bd
L
1163@item text
1164Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1165
1166@item notext
1167Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1168
1169@item textoff
1170Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1171
6aa29e7b
JJ
1172@item norelro
1173Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1174
cd6d6c15
NC
1175@item now
1176When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1177dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1178when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1179deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1180first called.
1181
1182@item origin
1183Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1184
6aa29e7b
JJ
1185@item relro
1186Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1187
24718e3b
L
1188@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1189Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1190
1191@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1192Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1193
04c3a755
NS
1194@item stack-size=@var{value}
1195Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1196Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1197@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1198
d258b828
IZ
1199@item bndplt
1200Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1201
889c2a67
L
1202@item noextern-protected-data
1203Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1204library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1205to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1206generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1207module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1208i386 and x86-64.
1209
aec6b87e
L
1210@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1211Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1212This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1213dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1214Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1215
4c10bbaa
L
1216@item noreloc-overflow
1217Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1218relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1219overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1220
caa65211
L
1221@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1222@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1223@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1224@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1225@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1226Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1227to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1228@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1229@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1230@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1231@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1232@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1233Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1234
cd6d6c15
NC
1235@end table
1236
ece2d90e 1237Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1238
1239@kindex -(
1240@cindex groups of archives
1241@item -( @var{archives} -)
1242@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1243The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1244either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1245
1246The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1247references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1248the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1249archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1250object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1251would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1252they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1253resolved.
1254
1255Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1256it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1257more archives.
1258
69da35b5
NC
1259@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1260@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1261@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1262@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1263Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1264recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1265and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1266the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1267behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1268so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1269restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1270
4a43e768
AM
1271@kindex --as-needed
1272@kindex --no-as-needed
1273@item --as-needed
1274@itemx --no-as-needed
1275This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1276on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1277the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1278on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1279needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1280emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1281non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1282the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1283non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1284Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1285the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1286needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1287from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1288
e56f61be
L
1289@kindex --add-needed
1290@kindex --no-add-needed
1291@item --add-needed
1292@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1293These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1294their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1295options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1296and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1297
252b5132
RH
1298@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1299@item -assert @var{keyword}
1300This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1301
1302@kindex -Bdynamic
1303@kindex -dy
1304@kindex -call_shared
1305@item -Bdynamic
1306@itemx -dy
1307@itemx -call_shared
1308Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1309for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1310default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1311for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1312multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1313@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1314
a1ab1d2a
UD
1315@kindex -Bgroup
1316@item -Bgroup
1317Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1318section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1319object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1320@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1321only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1322
252b5132
RH
1323@kindex -Bstatic
1324@kindex -dn
1325@kindex -non_shared
1326@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1327@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1328@itemx -dn
1329@itemx -non_shared
1330@itemx -static
1331Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1332platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1333variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1334may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1335library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1336option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1337option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1338shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1339references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1340libraries.
252b5132
RH
1341
1342@kindex -Bsymbolic
1343@item -Bsymbolic
1344When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1345definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1346for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1347within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1348@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1349executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1350the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1351support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1352
40b36307
L
1353@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1354@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1355When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1356symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1357This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1358when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1359to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1360This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1361libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1362
55255dae
L
1363@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1364@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1365Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1366typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1367global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1368within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1369to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1370in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1371which support shared libraries.
1372
1373The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1374scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1375
40b36307
L
1376@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1377@item --dynamic-list-data
1378Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1379
1380@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1381@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1382Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1383is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1384
0b8a70d9
L
1385@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1386@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1387Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1388
252b5132
RH
1389@kindex --check-sections
1390@kindex --no-check-sections
1391@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1392@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1393Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1394been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1395perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1396suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1397allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1398restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1399Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1400force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1401option.
252b5132 1402
ddbb8a31
NC
1403@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1404@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1405@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1406@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1407This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1408by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1409command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1410output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1411input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1412specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1413follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1414behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1415
1416This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1417libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1418mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1419their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1420required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1421the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1422dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1423symbols.
1424
252b5132
RH
1425@cindex cross reference table
1426@kindex --cref
1427@item --cref
1428Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1429generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1430Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1431
1432The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1433easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1434sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1435symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1436definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1437where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1438symbol are listed.
252b5132 1439
4818e05f
AM
1440@cindex common allocation
1441@kindex --no-define-common
1442@item --no-define-common
1443This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1444The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1445@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1446
1447The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1448the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1449of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1450forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1451Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1452from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1453This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1454and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1455duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1456paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1457
252b5132 1458@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1459@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1460@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1461Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1462address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1463times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1464limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1465context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1466symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1467constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1468using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1469@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1470equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1471
1472@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1473@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1474@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1475@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1476@itemx --no-demangle
1477These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1478and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1479present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1480underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1481mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1482different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1483to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1484demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1485is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1486
1487@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1488@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1489@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1490@item -I@var{file}
1491@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1492Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1493generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1494linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1495doing.
1496
9b8b325a
RF
1497@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1498@item --no-dynamic-linker
1499When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1500linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1501executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1502entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1503
7ce691ae 1504@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1505@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1506@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1507@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1508Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1509with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1510
252b5132
RH
1511@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1512@item --force-exe-suffix
1513Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1514
1515If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1516@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1517the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1518option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1519Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1520it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1521
1522@kindex --gc-sections
1523@kindex --no-gc-sections
1524@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1525@item --gc-sections
1526@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1527Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1528targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1529performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1530@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1531collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1532implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1533
d5465ba2
AM
1534@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1535examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1536symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1537command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1538referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1539libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1540referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1541the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1542relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1543
ac69cbc6 1544This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1545@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1546specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1547a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1548
c17d87de
NC
1549@kindex --print-gc-sections
1550@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1551@cindex garbage collection
1552@item --print-gc-sections
1553@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1554List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1555printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1556collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1557default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1558be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1559line.
1560
30824704
RM
1561@kindex --print-output-format
1562@cindex output format
1563@item --print-output-format
1564Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1565other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1566in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1567
3604cb1f
TG
1568@kindex --print-memory-usage
1569@cindex memory usage
1570@item --print-memory-usage
1571Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1572the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1573quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1574headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1575parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1576
1577@smallexample
1578Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1579 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1580 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1581@end smallexample
1582
252b5132
RH
1583@cindex help
1584@cindex usage
1585@kindex --help
1586@item --help
1587Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1588
ea20a7da
CC
1589@kindex --target-help
1590@item --target-help
1591Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1592
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1594@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1595Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1596@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1597
1598@cindex memory usage
1599@kindex --no-keep-memory
1600@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1601@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1602symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1603instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1604necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1605while linking a large executable.
1606
1607@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1608@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1609@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1610@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1611Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1612is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1613The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1614behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1615libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1616
aa713662
L
1617@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1618@kindex -z muldefs
1619@item --allow-multiple-definition
1620@itemx -z muldefs
1621Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1622report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1623first definition will be used.
1624
b79e8c78 1625@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1626@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1627@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1628@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1629Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1630This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1631determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1632shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1633how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1634
903249d7
NC
1635The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1636referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1637an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1638a shared library.
1639
1640The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1641libraries specified at link time are that:
1642
1643@itemize @bullet
1644@item
1645A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1646that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1647resolvable at load time.
1648@item
1649There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1650symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1651
1652The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1653select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1654architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1655appropriate memset function.
1656@end itemize
b79e8c78 1657
31941635
L
1658@kindex --no-undefined-version
1659@item --no-undefined-version
1660Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1661it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1662will be issued instead.
1663
3e3b46e5
PB
1664@kindex --default-symver
1665@item --default-symver
1666Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1667exported symbols.
1668
1669@kindex --default-imported-symver
1670@item --default-imported-symver
1671Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1672imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1673
252b5132
RH
1674@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1675@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1676Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1677files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1678been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1679This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1680errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1681have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1682inappropriate.
1683
fe7929ce
AM
1684@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1685@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1686Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1687library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@kindex --no-whole-archive
1690@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1691Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1692archive files.
1693
1694@cindex output file after errors
1695@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1696@item --noinhibit-exec
1697Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1698Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1699errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1700when it issues any error whatsoever.
1701
0a9c1c8e
CD
1702@kindex -nostdlib
1703@item -nostdlib
1704Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1705command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1706(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1707
252b5132 1708@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1709@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1710@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1711@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1712file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1713@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1714object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1715object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1716should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1717usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1718name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1719list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1720command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1721this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1722@end ifclear
1723
76359541
TP
1724@kindex --out-implib
1725@item --out-implib @var{file}
1726Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1727the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1728library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1729may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1730behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1731step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1732the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1733
36af4a4e
JJ
1734@kindex -pie
1735@kindex --pic-executable
1736@item -pie
1737@itemx --pic-executable
1738@cindex position independent executables
1739Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1740ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1741libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1742address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1743normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1744defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1745
252b5132
RH
1746@kindex -qmagic
1747@item -qmagic
1748This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1749
1750@kindex -Qy
1751@item -Qy
1752This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1753
1754@kindex --relax
1755@cindex synthesizing linker
1756@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1757@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1758@item --relax
28d5f677 1759@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1760An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1761@ifset GENERIC
1762This option is only supported on a few targets.
1763@end ifset
1764@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1765@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1766@end ifset
1767@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1768@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1769@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1770@ifset XTENSA
1771@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1772@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1773@ifset M68HC11
1774@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1775@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1776@ifset NIOSII
1777@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1778@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1779@ifset POWERPC
1780@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1781@end ifset
252b5132 1782
28d5f677
NC
1783On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1784global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1785addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1786synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1787instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1788
1789On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1790debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1791@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1792This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1793family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1794@end ifset
1795
1796@ifset GENERIC
1797On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1798but ignored.
1799@end ifset
1800
28d5f677
NC
1801On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1802@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1803
252b5132
RH
1804@cindex retaining specified symbols
1805@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1806@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1808@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1809Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1810discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1811symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1812@ifset GENERIC
1813(such as VxWorks)
1814@end ifset
1815where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1816run-time memory.
1817
1818@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1819or symbols needed for relocations.
1820
1821You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1822line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1823
1824@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1825@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1826@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1827@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1828Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1829linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1830arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1831them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1832also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1833objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1834@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1835ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1836@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1837
ff5dcc92 1838The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1839SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1840@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1841runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1842options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1843gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1844file systems.
252b5132 1845
ff5dcc92 1846For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1847followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1848the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1849@end ifset
1850
1851@ifset GENERIC
1852@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1853@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1854@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1855When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1856happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1857of the input files.
1858
1859When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1860non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1861shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1862explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1863specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1864@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1865either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1866appearing multiple times.
1867
e680a6b6
NC
1868The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1869directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1870containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1871and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
187264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1873
1874The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1875@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1876supported.
1877
28c309a2
NC
1878This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1879that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1880is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1881runtime linker would do.
1882
252b5132 1883The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1884libraries:
252b5132
RH
1885@enumerate
1886@item
ff5dcc92 1887Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1888@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1889Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1890between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1891specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1892used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1893at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1894by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1895the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1896@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1897On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1898@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1899environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1900@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1901On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1902directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1903@item
a1b8d843 1904For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1905variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1906@item
ec4eb78a
L
1907For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1908@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1909libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1910@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1911@item
252b5132
RH
1912The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1913@item
1914For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1915exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1916@end enumerate
1917
1918If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1919warning and continue with the link.
1920@end ifset
1921
1922@kindex -shared
1923@kindex -Bshareable
1924@item -shared
1925@itemx -Bshareable
1926@cindex shared libraries
1927Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1928and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1929shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1930undefined symbols in the link.
1931
252b5132 1932@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1933@item --sort-common
1934@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1935@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1936This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1937ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1938sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1939eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1940between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1941specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1942
2509a395
SL
1943@kindex --sort-section=name
1944@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1945This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1946patterns in the linker script.
1947
2509a395
SL
1948@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1949@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1950This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1951patterns in the linker script.
1952
252b5132 1953@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1954@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1955Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1956each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1957size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1958
1959@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1960@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1961Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1962output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1963This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1964certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1965cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1966that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1967support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1968input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1969more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1970many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1971
1972@kindex --stats
1973@item --stats
1974Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1975as execution time and memory usage.
1976
2509a395 1977@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1978@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1979Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1980configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1981that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1982
252b5132
RH
1983@kindex --traditional-format
1984@cindex traditional format
1985@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1986For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1987the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1988use the traditional format instead.
1989
1990@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1991For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1992symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1993full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1994@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1995trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1996combine duplicate entries.
1997
2509a395
SL
1998@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1999@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2000Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2001address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2002times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2003line.
2004@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2005for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2006@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2007should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2008sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2009
2509a395
SL
2010@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2011@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2012@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2013@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2014@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2015@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2016@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2017Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2018@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2019
2509a395
SL
2020@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2021@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2022@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2023When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2024byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2025
9d5777a3
RM
2026@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2027@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2028@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2029When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2030the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2031text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2032
0d705e9f
AM
2033@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2034@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2035@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2036When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2037model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2038
560e09e9
NC
2039@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2040@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2041Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2042values for @samp{method}:
2043
2044@table @samp
2045@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2046Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2047
2048@item report-all
da8bce14 2049Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2050
2051@item ignore-in-object-files
2052Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2053ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2054
2055@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2056Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2057ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2058when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2059libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2060command line.
2061@end table
2062
2063The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2064by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2065
2066Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2067unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2068can change this to a warning.
2069
1715a13c
L
2070@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2071@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2072@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2073@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2074Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2075supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2076the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2077argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2078
2079@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2080@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2081@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2082Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2083used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2084about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2085is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2086see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2087use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2088symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2089@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2090
7ce691ae 2091@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2092@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2093@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2094@item --warn-common
2095Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2096a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2097but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2098you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2099Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2100warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2101
2102There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2103
2104@table @samp
2105@item int i = 1;
2106A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2107file.
2108
2109@item extern int i;
2110An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2111There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2112variable somewhere.
2113
2114@item int i;
2115A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2116variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2117The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2118single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2119size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2120a definition of the same variable.
2121@end table
2122
2123The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2124Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2125just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2126encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2127a common symbol.
2128
2129@enumerate
2130@item
2131Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2132definition for the symbol.
2133@smallexample
2134@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2135 overridden by definition
2136@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2137@end smallexample
2138
2139@item
2140Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2141the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2142except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2143@smallexample
2144@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2145 overriding common
2146@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2147@end smallexample
2148
2149@item
2150Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2151@smallexample
2152@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2153 of `@var{symbol}'
2154@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2155@end smallexample
2156
2157@item
2158Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2159@smallexample
2160@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2161 overridden by larger common
2162@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2163@end smallexample
2164
2165@item
2166Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2167the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2168encountered in a different order.
2169@smallexample
2170@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2171 overriding smaller common
2172@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2173@end smallexample
2174@end enumerate
2175
2176@kindex --warn-constructors
2177@item --warn-constructors
2178Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2179object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2180detect the use of global constructors.
2181
2182@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2183@item --warn-multiple-gp
2184Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2185This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2186Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2187section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2188of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2189base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2190base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2191bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2192large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2193values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2194option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2195
2196@kindex --warn-once
2197@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2198@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2199@item --warn-once
2200Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2201which refers to it.
2202
2203@kindex --warn-section-align
2204@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2205@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2206@item --warn-section-align
2207Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2208alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2209The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2210is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2211the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2212
8fdd7217
NC
2213@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2214@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2215Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2216
a0c402a5
L
2217@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2218@item --warn-alternate-em
2219Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2220
560e09e9
NC
2221@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2222@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2223If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2224@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2225This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2226
2227@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2228@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2229This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2230it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2231
252b5132
RH
2232@kindex --whole-archive
2233@cindex including an entire archive
2234@item --whole-archive
2235For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2236@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2237in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2238files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2239library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2240library. This option may be used more than once.
2241
7ec229ce 2242Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2243about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2244Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2245list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2246your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2247
2509a395
SL
2248@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2249@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2250Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2251@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2252undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2253@var{symbol}.
2254
2255This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2256wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2257wishes to call the system function, it should call
2258@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2259
2260Here is a trivial example:
2261
2262@smallexample
2263void *
cc2f008e 2264__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2265@{
cc2f008e 2266 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2267 return __real_malloc (c);
2268@}
2269@end smallexample
2270
ff5dcc92 2271If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2272all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2273instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2274call the real @code{malloc} function.
2275
2276You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2277links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2278you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2279file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2280call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2281
6aa29e7b 2282@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2283@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2284@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2285@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2286Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2287(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2288section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2289
e41b3a13
JJ
2290@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2291@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2292Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2293generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2294if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2295
6c1439be
L
2296@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2297@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2298@item --enable-new-dtags
2299@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2300This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2301systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2302@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2303and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2304If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2305created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2306those options are only available for ELF systems.
2307
2d643429 2308@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2309@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2310Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2311close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2312time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2313increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2314value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2315
fdc90cb4
JJ
2316@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2317@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2318Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2319@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2320new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2321the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2322hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2323
0ce398f1
L
2324@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2325@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2326@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2327@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2328@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2329@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2330@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2331@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2332On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2333compressed using zlib.
2334
2335@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2336sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2337DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2338instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2339also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2340sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2341
2342The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2343@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2344
2345Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2346sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2347for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2348uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2349
2350The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2351involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2352default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2353@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2354
35835446
JR
2355@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2356@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2357This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2358linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2359for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2360about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2361
4f9c04f7 2362Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23631021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2364run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2365has been used.
2366
2367The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2368enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2369
c0065db7
RM
2370@kindex --build-id
2371@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2372@item --build-id
2373@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2374Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2375or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2376unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2377@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2378@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2379@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2380the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2381string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2382@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2383is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2384
2385The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2386that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2387unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2388to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2389file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2390string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2391
2392Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2393@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2394@end table
2395
0285c67d
NC
2396@c man end
2397
36f63dca 2398@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2399
0285c67d
NC
2400@c man begin OPTIONS
2401
ff5dcc92 2402The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2403the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2404normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2405use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2406@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2407like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2408symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2409object file).
2410
2411In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2412support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2413PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2414values by either a space or an equals sign.
2415
ff5dcc92 2416@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2417
2418@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2419@item --add-stdcall-alias
2420If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2421as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2422[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2423
2424@kindex --base-file
2425@item --base-file @var{file}
2426Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2427addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2428@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2429[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2430
2431@kindex --dll
2432@item --dll
2433Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2434@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2435file.
bb10df36 2436[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2437
88183869
DK
2438@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2439@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2440@item --enable-long-section-names
2441@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2442The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2443the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2444for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2445fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2446to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2447allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2448disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2449generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2450as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2451with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2452GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2453information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2454option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2455section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2456when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2457image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2458[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2459
252b5132
RH
2460@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2461@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2462@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2463@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2464If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2465do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2466only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2467resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2468undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2469@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2470to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2471warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2472import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2473to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2474feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2475@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2476mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2477[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2478
522f09cd
KT
2479@kindex --leading-underscore
2480@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2481@item --leading-underscore
2482@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2483For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2484in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2485disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2486
252b5132
RH
2487@cindex DLLs, creating
2488@kindex --export-all-symbols
2489@item --export-all-symbols
2490If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2491be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2492otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2493explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2494attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2495option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2496@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2497@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2498exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2499re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2500such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2501@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2502@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2503Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2504not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2505extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2506(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2507These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2508@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2509@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2510@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2511@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2512[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2513
2514@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2515@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2516Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2517exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2519
2927aaca
NC
2520@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2521@item --exclude-all-symbols
2522Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2523[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2524
252b5132
RH
2525@kindex --file-alignment
2526@item --file-alignment
2527Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2528file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2529512.
bb10df36 2530[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2531
2532@cindex heap size
2533@kindex --heap
2534@item --heap @var{reserve}
2535@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2536Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2537to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2538committed.
bb10df36 2539[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2540
2541@cindex image base
2542@kindex --image-base
2543@item --image-base @var{value}
2544Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2545the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2546is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2547your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2548other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2549for dlls.
bb10df36 2550[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2551
2552@kindex --kill-at
2553@item --kill-at
2554If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2555symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2557
26d2d8a2
BF
2558@kindex --large-address-aware
2559@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2560If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2561header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2562greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2563or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2564section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2565[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2566
f69a2f97
NC
2567@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2568@item --disable-large-address-aware
2569Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2570This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2571driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2572addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2573[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2574
252b5132
RH
2575@kindex --major-image-version
2576@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2577Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2578[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2579
2580@kindex --major-os-version
2581@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2582Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2584
2585@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2586@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2587Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2589
2590@kindex --minor-image-version
2591@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2592Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2593[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2594
2595@kindex --minor-os-version
2596@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2597Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2598[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2599
2600@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2601@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2602Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2603[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2604
2605@cindex DEF files, creating
2606@cindex DLLs, creating
2607@kindex --output-def
2608@item --output-def @var{file}
2609The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2610file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2611(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2612library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2613automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2614[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2615
b044cda1 2616@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2617@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2618@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2619@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2620Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2621@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2622By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2623for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2624execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2625[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2626
2627@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2628@item --disable-auto-image-base
2629Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2630user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2631default.
bb10df36 2632[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2633
2634@cindex DLLs, linking to
2635@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2636@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2637When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2638search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2639@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2640between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2641uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2642@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2643[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2644
2645@kindex --enable-auto-import
2646@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2647Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2648DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2649building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2650'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2651to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2652specification published by Microsoft.
2653
e2a83dd0
NC
2654Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2655data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2656placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2657around a problem with consts that is described here:
2658http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2659
4d8907ac
DS
2660Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2661see this message:
0d888aac 2662
ece2d90e 2663"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2664documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2665
ece2d90e
NC
2666This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2667ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2668allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2669fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2670constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2671multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2672this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2673of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2674the warning, and exit.
2675
2676There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2677data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2678
2fa9fc65
NC
2679One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2680of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2681this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2682
c0065db7
RM
2683A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2684that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2685there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2686a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2687
2688@example
2689extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2690extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2691 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2692@end example
2693
2694or
2695
2696@example
2697extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2698extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2699 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2700@end example
2701
c0065db7 2702For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2703is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2704
2705@example
2706extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2707extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2708 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2709@end example
2710
c406afaf
NC
2711or
2712
2713@example
2714extern long long extern_ll;
2715extern_ll -->
2716 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2717@end example
2718
2fa9fc65 2719A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2720'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2721@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2722requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2723building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2724merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2725between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2726constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2727
2728Original:
2729@example
2730--foo.h
2731extern int arr[];
2732--foo.c
2733#include "foo.h"
2734void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2735 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2736@}
2737@end example
2738
2739Solution 1:
2740@example
2741--foo.h
2742extern int arr[];
2743--foo.c
2744#include "foo.h"
2745void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2746 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2747 volatile int *parr = arr;
2748 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2749@}
2750@end example
2751
2752Solution 2:
2753@example
2754--foo.h
2755/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2756#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2757 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2758#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2759#else
2760#define FOO_IMPORT
2761#endif
2762extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2763--foo.c
2764#include "foo.h"
2765void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2766 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2767@}
2768@end example
2769
c0065db7 2770A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2771library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2772for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2773functions).
bb10df36 2774[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2775
2776@kindex --disable-auto-import
2777@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2778Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2779@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2780[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2781
2fa9fc65
NC
2782@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2783@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2784If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2785that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2786a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2787environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2788[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2789
2790@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2791@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2792Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2793DLLs.
bb10df36 2794[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2795
b044cda1
CW
2796@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2797@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2798Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2799[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2800
252b5132
RH
2801@kindex --section-alignment
2802@item --section-alignment
2803Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2804addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2805[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2806
2807@cindex stack size
2808@kindex --stack
2809@item --stack @var{reserve}
2810@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2811Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2812to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2813committed.
bb10df36 2814[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2815
2816@kindex --subsystem
2817@item --subsystem @var{which}
2818@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2819@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2820Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2821legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2822@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2823the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2824@var{which}.
bb10df36 2825[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2826
2f563b51
DK
2827The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2828of the PE file header:
2829[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2830
2d5c3743
NC
2831@kindex --high-entropy-va
2832@item --high-entropy-va
2833Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2834(ASLR).
2835
2f563b51
DK
2836@kindex --dynamicbase
2837@item --dynamicbase
2838The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2839randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2840Vista for i386 PE targets.
2841
2842@kindex --forceinteg
2843@item --forceinteg
2844Code integrity checks are enforced.
2845
2846@kindex --nxcompat
2847@item --nxcompat
2848The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2849This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2850
2851@kindex --no-isolation
2852@item --no-isolation
2853Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2854
2855@kindex --no-seh
2856@item --no-seh
2857The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2858this image.
2859
2860@kindex --no-bind
2861@item --no-bind
2862Do not bind this image.
2863
2864@kindex --wdmdriver
2865@item --wdmdriver
2866The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2867
2f563b51
DK
2868@kindex --tsaware
2869@item --tsaware
2870The image is Terminal Server aware.
2871
0cb112f7
CF
2872@kindex --insert-timestamp
2873@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2874@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2875Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2876as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2877other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2878will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2879same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2880can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2881that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2882identically.
252b5132
RH
2883@end table
2884
0285c67d
NC
2885@c man end
2886
ac145307
BS
2887@ifset C6X
2888@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2889
2890@c man begin OPTIONS
2891
2892The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2893libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2894all executables use an index of 0.
2895
2896@table @gcctabopt
2897
2898@kindex --dsbt-size
2899@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2900This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2901or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2902entries.
2903
2904@kindex --dsbt-index
2905@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2906This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2907to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2908executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2909@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2910
fbd9ad90
PB
2911@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2912The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2913exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2914
ac145307
BS
2915@end table
2916
2917@c man end
2918@end ifset
2919
93fd0973
SC
2920@ifset M68HC11
2921@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2922
2923@c man begin OPTIONS
2924
2925The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2926memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2927
2928@table @gcctabopt
2929
2930@kindex --no-trampoline
2931@item --no-trampoline
2932This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2933is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2934instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2935
2936@kindex --bank-window
2937@item --bank-window @var{name}
2938This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2939the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2940The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2941paging and addresses within the memory window.
2942
2943@end table
2944
2945@c man end
2946@end ifset
2947
7fb9f789
NC
2948@ifset M68K
2949@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2950
2951@c man begin OPTIONS
2952
2953The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2954when linking for 68K targets.
2955
2956@table @gcctabopt
2957
2958@kindex --got
2959@item --got=@var{type}
2960This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2961@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2962@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2963Info entry for @file{ld}.
2964
2965@end table
2966
2967@c man end
2968@end ifset
2969
833794fc
MR
2970@ifset MIPS
2971@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2972
2973@c man begin OPTIONS
2974
2975The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2976generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2977
2978@table @gcctabopt
2979
2980@kindex --insn32
2981@item --insn32
2982@kindex --no-insn32
2983@itemx --no-insn32
2984These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2985generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2986or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
298732-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2988used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2989possible.
2990
2991@end table
2992
2993@c man end
2994@end ifset
2995
252b5132
RH
2996@ifset UsesEnvVars
2997@node Environment
2998@section Environment Variables
2999
0285c67d
NC
3000@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3001
560e09e9 3002You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3003@ifclear SingleFormat
3004@code{GNUTARGET},
3005@end ifclear
3006@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3007
36f63dca 3008@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3009@kindex GNUTARGET
3010@cindex default input format
3011@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3012use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3013of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3014@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3015of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3016attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3017this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3018there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3019object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3020BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3021in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3022@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3023
3024@kindex LDEMULATION
3025@cindex default emulation
3026@cindex emulation, default
3027@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3028@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3029behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3030available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3031the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3032variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3033linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3034
3035@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3036@cindex demangling, default
3037Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3038@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3039default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3040a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3041may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3042options.
3043
0285c67d
NC
3044@c man end
3045@end ifset
3046
252b5132
RH
3047@node Scripts
3048@chapter Linker Scripts
3049
3050@cindex scripts
3051@cindex linker scripts
3052@cindex command files
3053Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3054written in the linker command language.
3055
3056The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3057the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3058the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3059more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3060direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3061described below.
3062
3063The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3064yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3065linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3066to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3067such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3068
3069You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3070line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3071default linker script.
3072
3073You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3074to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3075Linker Scripts}.
3076
3077@menu
3078* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3079* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3080* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3081* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3082* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3083* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3084* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3085* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3086* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3087* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3088* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3089@end menu
3090
3091@node Basic Script Concepts
3092@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3093@cindex linker script concepts
3094We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3095describe the linker script language.
3096
3097The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3098file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3099@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3100The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3101purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3102among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3103section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3104in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3105
3106Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3107also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3108contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3109the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3110A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3111area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3112loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3113which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3114of debugging information.
3115
3116Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3117first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3118the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3119@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3120section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3121same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3122is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3123(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3124based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3125RAM address would be the VMA.
3126
3127You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3128program with the @samp{-h} option.
3129
3130Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3131@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3132has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3133information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3134will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3135static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3136referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3137
3138You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3139program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3140option.
3141
3142@node Script Format
3143@section Linker Script Format
3144@cindex linker script format
3145Linker scripts are text files.
3146
3147You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3148either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3149symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3150generally ignored.
3151
3152Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3153If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3154otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3155double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3156file name.
3157
3158You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3159@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3160to whitespace.
3161
3162@node Simple Example
3163@section Simple Linker Script Example
3164@cindex linker script example
3165@cindex example of linker script
3166Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3167
3168The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3169@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3170memory layout of the output file.
3171
3172The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3173describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3174code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3175@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3176Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3177your input files.
3178
3179For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31800x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3181linker script which will do that:
3182@smallexample
3183SECTIONS
3184@{
3185 . = 0x10000;
3186 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3187 . = 0x8000000;
3188 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3189 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3190@}
3191@end smallexample
3192
3193You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3194followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3195descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3196
252b5132
RH
3197The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3198sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3199counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3200other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3201current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3202incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3203@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3204
3205The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3206required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3207after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3208which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3209wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3210means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3211
3212Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3213@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3214@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3215
3216The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3217the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3218at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3219output section, the value of the location counter will be
3220@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3221effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3222immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3223
3224The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3225alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3226example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3227sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3228may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3229sections.
3230
3231That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3232
3233@node Simple Commands
3234@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3235@cindex linker script simple commands
3236In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3237
3238@menu
3239* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3240* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3241@ifclear SingleFormat
3242* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3243@end ifclear
3244
4a93e180 3245* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3246* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3247@end menu
3248
3249@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3250@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3251@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3252@cindex start of execution
3253@cindex first instruction
3254@cindex entry point
3255The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3256point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3257entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3258@smallexample
3259ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3260@end smallexample
3261
3262There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3263entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3264stopping when one of them succeeds:
3265@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3266@item
252b5132 3267the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3268@item
252b5132 3269the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3270@item
3ab904c4
NC
3271the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3272targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3273check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3274@item
252b5132 3275the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3276@item
252b5132
RH
3277The address @code{0}.
3278@end itemize
3279
3280@node File Commands
36f63dca 3281@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3282@cindex linker script file commands
3283Several linker script commands deal with files.
3284
3285@table @code
3286@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3287@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3288@cindex including a linker script
3289Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3290be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3291with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
329210 levels deep.
3293
4006703d
NS
3294You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3295@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3296
252b5132
RH
3297@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3298@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3299@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3300@cindex input files in linker scripts
3301@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3302@cindex linker script input object files
3303The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3304in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3305
3306For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3307a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3308then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3309
3310In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3311script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3312
e3f2db7f
AO
3313In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3314with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3315located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3316for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3317open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3318linker will search through the archive library search path.
3319The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3320as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3321description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3322
ff5dcc92 3323If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3324name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3325@samp{-l}.
3326
3327When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3328files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3329script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3330
3331@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3332@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3333@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3334@cindex grouping input files
3335The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3336files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3337new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3338in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3339
b717d30e
JJ
3340@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3341@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3342@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3343This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3344commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3345as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3346with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3347when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3348@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3349and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3350setting afterwards.
3351
252b5132
RH
3352@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3353@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3354@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3355The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3356@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3357@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3358Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3359precedence.
3360
3361You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3362output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3363
3364@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3365@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3366@cindex library search path in linker script
3367@cindex archive search path in linker script
3368@cindex search path in linker script
3369The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3370@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3371@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3372on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3373are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3374the command line option are searched first.
3375
3376@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3377@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3378@cindex first input file
3379The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3380that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3381though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3382when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3383first file.
3384@end table
3385
3386@ifclear SingleFormat
3387@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3388@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3389A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3390
3391@table @code
3392@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3393@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3394@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3395@cindex output file format in linker script
3396The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3397output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3398exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3399(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3400line option takes precedence.
3401
3402You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3403formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3404This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3405desired endianness.
3406
3407If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3408will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3409output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3410used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3411
3412For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3413command:
3414@smallexample
3415OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3416@end smallexample
3417This says that the default format for the output file is
3418@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3419option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3420format.
3421
3422@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3423@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3424@cindex input file format in linker script
3425The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3426files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3427This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3428(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3429is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3430command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3431@end table
3432@end ifclear
3433
4a93e180
NC
3434@node REGION_ALIAS
3435@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3436@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3437@cindex region alias
3438@cindex region names
3439
3440Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3441@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3442
3443@smallexample
3444REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3445@end smallexample
3446
3447The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3448memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3449to memory regions. An example follows.
3450
3451Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3452memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3453that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3454non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3455access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3456read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3457sections:
3458
3459@itemize @bullet
3460@item
3461@code{.text} program code;
3462@item
3463@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3464@item
3465@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3466@item
3467@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3468@end itemize
3469
3470The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3471part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3472output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3473systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3474@code{C}:
3475@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3476@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3477@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3478@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3479@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3480@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3481@end multitable
3482The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3483loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3484the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3485the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3486
3487The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3488includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3489memory layout:
3490@smallexample
3491INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3492
3493SECTIONS
3494 @{
3495 .text :
3496 @{
3497 *(.text)
3498 @} > REGION_TEXT
3499 .rodata :
3500 @{
3501 *(.rodata)
3502 rodata_end = .;
3503 @} > REGION_RODATA
3504 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3505 @{
3506 data_start = .;
3507 *(.data)
3508 @} > REGION_DATA
3509 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3510 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3511 .bss :
3512 @{
3513 *(.bss)
3514 @} > REGION_BSS
3515 @}
3516@end smallexample
3517
3518Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3519regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3520variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3521@table @code
3522@item A
3523Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3524@smallexample
3525MEMORY
3526 @{
3527 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3528 @}
3529
3530REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3531REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3532REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3533REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3534@end smallexample
3535@item B
3536Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3537into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3538@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3539@smallexample
3540MEMORY
3541 @{
3542 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3543 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3544 @}
3545
3546REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3547REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3548REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3549REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3550@end smallexample
3551@item C
3552Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3553@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3554initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3555system start into the @code{RAM}.
3556@smallexample
3557MEMORY
3558 @{
3559 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3560 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3561 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3562 @}
3563
3564REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3565REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3566REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3567REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3568@end smallexample
3569@end table
3570
3571It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3572@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3573necessary:
3574@smallexample
3575#include <string.h>
3576
3577extern char data_start [];
3578extern char data_size [];
3579extern char data_load_start [];
3580
3581void copy_data(void)
3582@{
3583 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3584 @{
3585 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3586 @}
3587@}
3588@end smallexample
3589
252b5132 3590@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3591@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3592There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3593
3594@table @code
3595@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3596@kindex ASSERT
3597@cindex assertion in linker script
3598Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3599with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3600
fd1c4238
NC
3601Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3602take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3603inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3604for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3605symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3606
3607@smallexample
3608 .stack :
3609 @{
3610 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3611 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3612 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3613 @}
3614@end smallexample
3615
3616will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3617PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3618can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3619
3620@smallexample
3621 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3622 .stack :
3623 @{
3624 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3625 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3626 @}
3627@end smallexample
3628
3629will work.
3630
252b5132
RH
3631@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3632@kindex EXTERN
3633@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3634Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3635symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3636modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3637each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3638command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3639
3640@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3641@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3642@cindex common allocation in linker script
3643This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3644to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3645output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3646
4818e05f
AM
3647@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3648@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3649@cindex common allocation in linker script
3650This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3651command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3652to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3653
53d25da6
AM
3654@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3655@kindex INSERT
3656@cindex insert user script into default script
3657This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3658augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3659inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3660@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3661default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3662sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3663linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3664insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3665linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3666default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3667of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3668to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3669is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3670
3671@smallexample
3672SECTIONS
3673@{
3674 OVERLAY :
3675 @{
3676 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3677 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3678 @}
3679@}
3680INSERT AFTER .text;
3681@end smallexample
3682
252b5132
RH
3683@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3684@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3685@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3686This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3687references among certain output sections.
3688
3689In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3690using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3691will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3692errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3693a function defined in the other section.
3694
3695The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3696@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3697an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3698@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3699names.
3700
cdf96953
MF
3701@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3702@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3703@cindex cross references
3704This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3705references to one section from a list of other sections.
3706
3707The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3708output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3709a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3710there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3711must never call back.
3712
3713The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3714The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3715If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3716the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3717status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3718names, not input section names.
3719
252b5132
RH
3720@ifclear SingleFormat
3721@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3722@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3723@cindex machine architecture
3724@cindex architecture
3725Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3726of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3727architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3728the @samp{-f} option.
3729@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3730
3731@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3732@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3733This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3734@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3735in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3736@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3737@end table
3738
3739@node Assignments
3740@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3741@cindex assignment in scripts
3742@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3743@cindex variables, defining
3744You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3745the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3746
3747@menu
3748* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3749* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3750* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3751* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3752* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3753@end menu
3754
3755@node Simple Assignments
3756@subsection Simple Assignments
3757
3758You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3759
3760@table @code
3761@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3762@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3763@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3764@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3765@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3766@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3767@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3768@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3769@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3770@end table
3771
3772The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3773@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3774defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3775
3776The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3777may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3778
3779The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3780
3781Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3782
3783You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3784statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3785section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3786
3787The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3788expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3789
3790Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3791assignments may be used:
3792
3793@smallexample
3794floating_point = 0;
3795SECTIONS
3796@{
3797 .text :
3798 @{
3799 *(.text)
3800 _etext = .;
3801 @}
156e34dd 3802 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3803 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3804@}
3805@end smallexample
3806@noindent
3807In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3808zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3809the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3810defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3811upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3812
eb8476a6
MR
3813@node HIDDEN
3814@subsection HIDDEN
3815@cindex HIDDEN
3816For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3817exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3818
3819Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3820@code{HIDDEN}:
3821
3822@smallexample
3823HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3824SECTIONS
3825@{
3826 .text :
3827 @{
3828 *(.text)
3829 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3830 @}
3831 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3832 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3833@}
3834@end smallexample
3835@noindent
3836In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3837
252b5132
RH
3838@node PROVIDE
3839@subsection PROVIDE
3840@cindex PROVIDE
3841In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3842only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3843the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3844@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3845@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3846@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3847@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3848@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3849
3850Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3851@smallexample
3852SECTIONS
3853@{
3854 .text :
3855 @{
3856 *(.text)
3857 _etext = .;
3858 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3859 @}
3860@}
3861@end smallexample
3862
3863In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3864underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3865the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3866underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3867If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3868linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3869
7af8e998
L
3870@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3871@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3872@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3873Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3874hidden and won't be exported.
3875
73ae6183
NC
3876@node Source Code Reference
3877@subsection Source Code Reference
3878
3879Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3880intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3881a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3882symbol that does not have a value.
3883
3884Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3885transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3886stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3887prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3888mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3889of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3890variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3891linker script variable might be referred to as:
3892
3893@smallexample
3894 extern int foo;
3895@end smallexample
3896
3897But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3898
3899@smallexample
3900 _foo = 1000;
3901@end smallexample
3902
3903In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3904transformation has taken place.
3905
3906When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3907things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3908in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3909second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3910table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3911contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3912value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3913
3914@smallexample
3915 int foo = 1000;
3916@end smallexample
3917
10bf6894 3918creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3919holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3920number 1000 is initially stored.
3921
3922When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3923first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3924memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3925So:
3926
3927@smallexample
3928 foo = 1;
3929@end smallexample
3930
3931looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3932associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3933address. Whereas:
3934
3935@smallexample
3936 int * a = & foo;
3937@end smallexample
3938
10bf6894 3939looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3940and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3941the variable @samp{a}.
3942
3943Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3944the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3945an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3946
3947@smallexample
3948 foo = 1000;
3949@end smallexample
3950
3951creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3952the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3953address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3954linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3955access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3956
3957Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3958you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3959use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3960section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3961linker script contains these declarations:
3962
3963@smallexample
3964@group
3965 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3966 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3967 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3968@end group
3969@end smallexample
3970
3971Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3972
3973@smallexample
3974@group
3975 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3976
73ae6183
NC
3977 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3978@end group
3979@end smallexample
3980
3981Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3982Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3983arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3984
3985@smallexample
3986@group
3987 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3988
3989 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3990@end group
3991@end smallexample
3992
3993Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3994operators.
73ae6183 3995
252b5132 3996@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3997@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3998@kindex SECTIONS
3999The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4000into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4001
4002The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4003@smallexample
4004SECTIONS
4005@{
4006 @var{sections-command}
4007 @var{sections-command}
4008 @dots{}
4009@}
4010@end smallexample
4011
4012Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4013
4014@itemize @bullet
4015@item
4016an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4017@item
4018a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4019@item
4020an output section description
4021@item
4022an overlay description
4023@end itemize
4024
4025The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4026@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4027those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4028understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4029the layout of the output file.
4030
4031Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4032below.
4033
4034If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4035linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4036section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4037input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4038example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4039in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4040
4041@menu
4042* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4043* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4044* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4045* Input Section:: Input section description
4046* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4047* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4048* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4049* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4050* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4051@end menu
4052
4053@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4054@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4055The full description of an output section looks like this:
4056@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4057@group
7e7d5768 4058@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4059 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4060 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4061 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4062 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4063 @{
4064 @var{output-section-command}
4065 @var{output-section-command}
4066 @dots{}
abc9061b 4067 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4068@end group
4069@end smallexample
4070
4071Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4072
4073The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4074name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4075The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4076the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4077The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4078
4079Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4080
4081@itemize @bullet
4082@item
4083a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4084@item
4085an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4086@item
4087data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4088@item
4089a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4090@end itemize
4091
4092@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4093@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4094@cindex name, section
4095@cindex section name
4096The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4097meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4098support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4099must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4100example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4101output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4102names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4103quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4104characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4105commas must be quoted.
4106
4107The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4108Discarding}.
4109
4110@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4111@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4112@cindex address, section
4113@cindex section address
4114The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4115address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4116is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4117
4118If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4119section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4120to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4121alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4122contained within the output section.
4123
4124The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4125
4126@itemize @bullet
4127@item
4128If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4129is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4130in that region.
4131
4132@item
4133If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4134regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4135section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4136be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4137
4138@item
4139If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4140the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4141counter.
4142@end itemize
4143
4144@noindent
4145For example:
4146
252b5132
RH
4147@smallexample
4148.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4149@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4150
252b5132
RH
4151@noindent
4152and
ea5cae92 4153
252b5132
RH
4154@smallexample
4155.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4156@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4157
252b5132
RH
4158@noindent
4159are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4160@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4161counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4162counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4163input sections.
252b5132
RH
4164
4165The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4166For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4167so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4168do something like this:
4169@smallexample
4170.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4171@end smallexample
4172@noindent
4173This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4174aligned upward to the specified value.
4175
4176Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4177location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4178sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4179
4180@node Input Section
36f63dca 4181@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4182@cindex input sections
4183@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4184The most common output section command is an input section description.
4185
4186The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4187You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4188in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4189map the input files into your memory layout.
4190
4191@menu
4192* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4193* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4194* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4195* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4196* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4197@end menu
4198
4199@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4200@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4201@cindex input section basics
4202An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4203by a list of section names in parentheses.
4204
4205The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4206describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4207
4208The most common input section description is to include all input
4209sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4210include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4211@smallexample
4212*(.text)
4213@end smallexample
4214@noindent
18625d54 4215Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4216@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4217of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4218match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4219example:
252b5132 4220@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4221EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4222@end smallexample
4223@noindent
4224will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4225and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4226placed inside the section list, for example:
4227@smallexample
b4346c09 4228*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4229@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4230@noindent
4231The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4232two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4233more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4234
4235There are two ways to include more than one section:
4236@smallexample
4237*(.text .rdata)
4238*(.text) *(.rdata)
4239@end smallexample
4240@noindent
4241The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4242@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4243first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4244they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4245@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4246@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4247
8f1732fc
AB
4248When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4249is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4250immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4251@smallexample
4252*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4253@end smallexample
4254@noindent
4255will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4256@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4257from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4258exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4259could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4260@smallexample
4261*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4262@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4263@noindent
4264Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4265before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4266all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4267@smallexample
4268EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4269@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4270
252b5132
RH
4271You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4272You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4273needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4274@smallexample
4275data.o(.data)
4276@end smallexample
4277
ae17ab41
CM
4278To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4279of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4280
4281Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4282
4283@smallexample
4284@group
4285SECTIONS @{
4286 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4287 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4288@}
4289@end group
4290@end smallexample
4291
4292In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4293input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4294@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4295@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4296whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4297
967928e9
AM
4298You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4299matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4300with no whitespace around the colon.
4301
4302@table @samp
4303@item archive:file
4304matches file within archive
4305@item archive:
4306matches the whole archive
4307@item :file
4308matches file but not one in an archive
4309@end table
4310
4311Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4312wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4313single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4314@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4315within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4316also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4317other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4318from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4319command.
4320
252b5132
RH
4321If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4322the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4323commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4324@smallexample
4325data.o
4326@end smallexample
4327
967928e9
AM
4328When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4329and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4330characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4331name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4332did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4333though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4334@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4335the archive search path.
4336
4337@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4338@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4339@cindex input section wildcards
4340@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4341@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4342@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4343In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4344name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4345
4346The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4347pattern for the file name.
4348
4349The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4350
4351@table @samp
4352@item *
4353matches any number of characters
4354@item ?
4355matches any single character
4356@item [@var{chars}]
4357matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4358character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4359@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4360@item \
4361quotes the following character
4362@end table
4363
4364When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4365will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4366Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4367exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4368@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4369a @samp{/} character.
4370
4371File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4372specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4373does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4374
4375If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4376appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4377will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4378sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4379@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4380@smallexample
4381.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4382.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4383@end smallexample
4384
bcaa7b3e 4385@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4386Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4387in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4388this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4389pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4390@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4391into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4392
bcaa7b3e
L
4393@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4394@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4395difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4396descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4397Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4398reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4399
02ecc8e9
L
4400@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4401@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4402difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4403ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4404encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4405
bcaa7b3e
L
4406@cindex SORT
4407@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4408
4409When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4410can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4411
4412@enumerate
4413@item
4414@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4415It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4416sections have the same name.
4417@item
4418@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4419It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4420sections have the same alignment.
4421@item
c0065db7 4422@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4423treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4424@item
4425@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4426is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4427@item
4428All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4429@end enumerate
4430
4431When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4432section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4433takes precedence over the command line option.
4434
4435If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4436command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4437treated as nested sorting command.
4438
4439@enumerate
4440@item
4441@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4442@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4443@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4444@item
4445@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4446@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4447@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4448@end enumerate
4449
4450If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4451command line option will be ignored.
4452
eda680f8
L
4453@cindex SORT_NONE
4454@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4455section sorting option.
4456
252b5132
RH
4457If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4458@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4459precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4460
4461This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4462files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4463sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4464The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4465with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4466linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4467@smallexample
4468@group
4469SECTIONS @{
4470 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4471 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4472 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4473 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4474@}
4475@end group
4476@end smallexample
4477
4478@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4479@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4480@cindex common symbol placement
4481@cindex uninitialized data placement
4482A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4483file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4484linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4485named @samp{COMMON}.
4486
4487You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4488other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4489particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4490input files are placed in another section.
4491
4492In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4493@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4494@smallexample
4495.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4496@end smallexample
4497
4498@cindex scommon section
4499@cindex small common symbols
4500Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4501example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4502symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4503different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4504the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4505symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4506to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4507locations.
4508
4509@cindex [COMMON]
4510You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4511notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4512@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4513
4514@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4515@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4516@cindex KEEP
4517@cindex garbage collection
4518When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4519it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4520This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4521with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4522@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4523
4524@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4525@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4526The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4527to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4528start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4529@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4530follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4531@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4532@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4533All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4534files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4535
4536@smallexample
4537@group
4538SECTIONS @{
4539 outputa 0x10000 :
4540 @{
4541 all.o
4542 foo.o (.input1)
4543 @}
36f63dca
NC
4544@end group
4545@group
252b5132
RH
4546 outputb :
4547 @{
4548 foo.o (.input2)
4549 foo1.o (.input1)
4550 @}
36f63dca
NC
4551@end group
4552@group
252b5132
RH
4553 outputc :
4554 @{
4555 *(.input1)
4556 *(.input2)
4557 @}
4558@}
4559@end group
a1ab1d2a 4560@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4561
4562@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4563@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4564@cindex data
4565@cindex section data
4566@cindex output section data
4567@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4568@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4569@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4570@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4571@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4572You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4573@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4574an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4575parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4576value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4577counter.
4578
4579The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4580store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4581bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4582stored.
4583
4584For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4585of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4586@smallexample
4587BYTE(1)
4588LONG(addr)
4589@end smallexample
4590
4591When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4592same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4593target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4594@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4595@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4596
4597If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4598which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4599When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4600true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4601endianness of the first input object file.
4602
36f63dca 4603Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4604between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4605@smallexample
4606SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4607@end smallexample
4608whereas this will work:
4609@smallexample
4610SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4611@end smallexample
4612
252b5132
RH
4613@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4614@cindex holes, filling
4615@cindex unspecified memory
4616You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4617current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4618otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4619gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4620with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4621necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4622point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4623than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4624different parts of an output section.
4625
4626This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4627value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4628@smallexample
563e308f 4629FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4630@end smallexample
4631
4632The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4633section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4634part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4635entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4636precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4637expression.
252b5132
RH
4638
4639@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4640@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4641There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4642commands.
4643
4644@table @code
4645@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4646@cindex input filename symbols
4647@cindex filename symbols
4648@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4649The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4650The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4651file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4652the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4653
4654This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4655normally used for any other object file format.
4656
4657@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4658@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4659@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4660@item CONSTRUCTORS
4661When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4662unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4663destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4664arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4665automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4666For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4667linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4668@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4669ignored for other object file formats.
4670
4671The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4672constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4673Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4674the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4675first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4676of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4677compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4678formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4679@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4680the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4681destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4682@code{exit}.
4683
4684For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4685arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4686addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4687and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4688linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4689runtime code expects to see.
4690
4691@smallexample
4692 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4693 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4694 *(.ctors)
4695 LONG(0)
4696 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4697 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4698 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4699 *(.dtors)
4700 LONG(0)
4701 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4702@end smallexample
4703
4704If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4705which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4706are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4707are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4708command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4709@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4710@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4711@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4712
4713Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4714and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4715need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4716scripts.
4717
4718@end table
4719
4720@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4721@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4722@cindex discarding sections
4723@cindex sections, discarding
4724@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4725The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4726This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4727may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4728@smallexample
49c13adb 4729.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4730@end smallexample
4731@noindent
4732will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4733@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4734sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4735space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4736too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4737space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4738@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4739@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4740This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4741
a0976ea4 4742The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4743on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4744symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4745the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4746section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4747
4748@cindex /DISCARD/
4749The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4750input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4751section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4752
4753@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4754@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4755@cindex output section attributes
4756We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4757like this:
0c71d759 4758
252b5132 4759@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4760@group
7e7d5768 4761@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4762 [AT(@var{lma})]
4763 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4764 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4765 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4766 @{
4767 @var{output-section-command}
4768 @var{output-section-command}
4769 @dots{}
562d3460 4770 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4771@end group
4772@end smallexample
0c71d759 4773
252b5132
RH
4774We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4775@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4776remaining section attributes.
4777
a1ab1d2a 4778@menu
252b5132
RH
4779* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4780* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4781* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4782* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4783* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4784* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4785* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4786* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4787@end menu
4788
4789@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4790@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4791Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4792parentheses. The following types are defined:
4793
4794@table @code
4795@item NOLOAD
4796The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4797loaded into memory when the program is run.
4798@item DSECT
4799@itemx COPY
4800@itemx INFO
4801@itemx OVERLAY
4802These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4803rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4804marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4805section when the program is run.
4806@end table
4807
4808@kindex NOLOAD
4809@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4810@cindex loading, preventing
4811The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4812the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4813the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4814@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4815need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4816@smallexample
4817@group
4818SECTIONS @{
4819 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4820 @dots{}
4821@}
4822@end group
4823@end smallexample
4824
4825@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4826@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4827@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4828@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4829@cindex load address
4830@cindex section load address
4831Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4832@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4833@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4834specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4835address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4836
ea5cae92
NC
4837The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4838specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4839takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4840load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4841region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4842
4843If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4844section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4845load address:
4846
4847@itemize @bullet
4848@item
4849If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4850the LMA address as well.
4851
4852@item
4853If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4854
4855@item
4856Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4857with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4858section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4859VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4860the last section in the located region.
4861
4862@item
4863If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4864that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4865
4866@item
4867If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4868section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4869@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4870
4871@cindex ROM initialized data
4872@cindex initialized data in ROM
4873This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4874example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4875called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4876@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4877even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4878uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4879defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4880counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4881
4882@smallexample
4883@group
4884SECTIONS
4885 @{
4886 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4887 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4888 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4889 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4890 .bss 0x3000 :
4891 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4892@}
4893@end group
4894@end smallexample
4895
4896The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4897this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4898the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4899how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4900script.
4901
4902@smallexample
4903@group
4904extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4905char *src = &_etext;
4906char *dst = &_data;
4907
ea5cae92
NC
4908/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4909while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4910 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4911
ea5cae92 4912/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4913for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4914 *dst = 0;
4915@end group
4916@end smallexample
4917
bbf115d3
L
4918@node Forced Output Alignment
4919@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4920@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4921@cindex forcing output section alignment
4922@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4923You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4924alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4925intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4926
7e7d5768
AM
4927@node Forced Input Alignment
4928@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4929@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4930@cindex forcing input section alignment
4931@cindex input section alignment
4932You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4933SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4934sections, whether larger or smaller.
4935
0c71d759
NC
4936@node Output Section Constraint
4937@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4938@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4939@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4940@cindex constraints on output sections
4941You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4942of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4943read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4944@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4945
252b5132 4946@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4947@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4948@kindex >@var{region}
4949@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4950@cindex memory regions and sections
4951You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4952using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4953
4954Here is a simple example:
4955@smallexample
4956@group
4957MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4958SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4959@end group
4960@end smallexample
4961
4962@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4963@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4964@kindex :@var{phdr}
4965@cindex section, assigning to program header
4966@cindex program headers and sections
4967You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4968using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4969one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4970assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4971@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4972linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4973
4974Here is a simple example:
4975@smallexample
4976@group
4977PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4978SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4979@end group
4980@end smallexample
4981
4982@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4983@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4984@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4985@cindex section fill pattern
4986@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4987You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4988@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4989(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4990within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4991alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4992necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4993of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4994an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4995fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4996other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4997pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4998expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4999
5000You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5001output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5002
5003Here is a simple example:
5004@smallexample
5005@group
563e308f 5006SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5007@end group
5008@end smallexample
5009
5010@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5011@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5012@kindex OVERLAY
5013@cindex overlays
5014An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5015are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5016the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5017copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5018required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5019can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5020than another.
5021
5022Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5023@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5024output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5025command is as follows:
5026@smallexample
5027@group
5028OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5029 @{
5030 @var{secname1}
5031 @{
5032 @var{output-section-command}
5033 @var{output-section-command}
5034 @dots{}
5035 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5036 @var{secname2}
5037 @{
5038 @var{output-section-command}
5039 @var{output-section-command}
5040 @dots{}
5041 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5042 @dots{}
abc9061b 5043 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5044@end group
5045@end smallexample
5046
5047Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5048section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5049section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5050those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5051except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5052sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5053
abc9061b
CC
5054The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5055the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5056
252b5132
RH
5057The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5058addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5059memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5060whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5061and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5062and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5063
56dd11f0
NC
5064If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5065references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5066the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5067sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5068@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5069
5070For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5071provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5072defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5073@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5074the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5075within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5076symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5077
5078At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5079the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5080
5081Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5082@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5083@smallexample
5084@group
5085 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5086 @{
5087 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5088 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5089 @}
5090@end group
5091@end smallexample
5092@noindent
5093This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5094address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5095@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5096following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5097@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5098@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5099
5100C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5101like the following.
5102
5103@smallexample
5104@group
5105 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5106 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5107 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5108@end group
5109@end smallexample
5110
5111Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5112everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5113example could have been written identically as follows.
5114
5115@smallexample
5116@group
5117 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5118 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5119 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5120 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5121 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5122 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5123 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5124@end group
5125@end smallexample
5126
5127@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5128@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5129@kindex MEMORY
5130@cindex memory regions
5131@cindex regions of memory
5132@cindex allocating memory
5133@cindex discontinuous memory
5134The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5135memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5136
5137The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5138memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5139may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5140can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5141set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5142regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5143around to fit into the available regions.
5144
127fcdff
AB
5145A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5146however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5147specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5148@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5149@smallexample
5150@group
a1ab1d2a 5151MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5152 @{
5153 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5154 @dots{}
5155 @}
5156@end group
5157@end smallexample
5158
5159The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5160region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5161Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5162with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5163must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5164add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5165command.
252b5132
RH
5166
5167@cindex memory region attributes
5168The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5169whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5170not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5171@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5172section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5173the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5174them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5175
5176The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5177@table @samp
5178@item R
5179Read-only section
5180@item W
5181Read/write section
5182@item X
5183Executable section
5184@item A
5185Allocatable section
5186@item I
5187Initialized section
5188@item L
5189Same as @samp{I}
5190@item !
c09e9a8c 5191Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5192@end table
5193
5194If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5195@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5196attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5197in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5198attributes.
5199
5200@kindex ORIGIN =
5201@kindex o =
5202@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5203The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5204the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5205cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5206abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5207@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5208
5209@kindex LENGTH =
5210@kindex len =
5211@kindex l =
5212The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5213region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5214be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5215@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5216
5217In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5218available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5219and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5220linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5221is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5222or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5223explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5224region.
5225
5226@smallexample
5227@group
a1ab1d2a 5228MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5229 @{
5230 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5231 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5232 @}
5233@end group
5234@end smallexample
5235
5236Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5237specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5238@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5239a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5240output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5241was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5242the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5243output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5244region, the linker will issue an error message.
5245
3ec57632 5246It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5247expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5248@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5249
5250@smallexample
5251@group
c0065db7 5252 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5253@end group
5254@end smallexample
5255
252b5132
RH
5256@node PHDRS
5257@section PHDRS Command
5258@kindex PHDRS
5259@cindex program headers
5260@cindex ELF program headers
5261@cindex program segments
5262@cindex segments, ELF
5263The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5264@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5265loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5266program with the @samp{-p} option.
5267
5268When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5269reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5270program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5271This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5272interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5273
5274The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5275in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5276precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5277the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5278not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5279
5280The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5281generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5282ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5283
5284This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5285@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5286
5287@smallexample
5288@group
5289PHDRS
5290@{
5291 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5292 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5293@}
5294@end group
5295@end smallexample
5296
5297The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5298of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5299header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5300with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5301must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5302is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5303
5304Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5305system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5306specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5307sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5308attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5309Section Phdr}.
5310
5311It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5312merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5313repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5314contain the section.
5315
5316If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5317then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5318not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5319convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5320placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5321default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5322segment at all.
5323
5324@kindex FILEHDR
5325@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5326You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5327the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5328The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5329file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5330include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5331segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5332these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5333
5334The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5335value of the keyword.
5336
5337@table @asis
5338@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5339Indicates an unused program header.
5340
5341@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5342Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5343the file.
5344
5345@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5346Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5347
5348@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5349Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5350found.
5351
5352@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5353Indicates a segment holding note information.
5354
5355@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5356A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5357ABI.
5358
5359@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5360Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5361
1a9ccd70
NC
5362@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5363Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5364
252b5132
RH
5365@item @var{expression}
5366An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5367be used for types not defined above.
5368@end table
5369
5370You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5371in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5372@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5373Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5374output section attribute.
5375
5376The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5377which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5378explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5379an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5380header.
5381
5382Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5383headers used on a native ELF system.
5384
5385@example
5386@group
5387PHDRS
5388@{
5389 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5390 interp PT_INTERP ;
5391 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5392 data PT_LOAD ;
5393 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5394@}
5395
5396SECTIONS
5397@{
5398 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5399 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5400 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5401 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5402 @dots{}
5403 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5404 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5405 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5406 @dots{}
5407@}
5408@end group
5409@end example
5410
5411@node VERSION
5412@section VERSION Command
5413@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5414@cindex symbol versions
5415@cindex version script
5416@cindex versions of symbols
5417The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5418only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5419symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5420a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5421shared library.
5422
5423You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5424you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5425also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5426
5427The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5428@smallexample
5429VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5430@end smallexample
5431
5432The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5433Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5434version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5435version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5436version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5437scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5438library.
5439
5440The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5441examples.
5442
5443@smallexample
5444VERS_1.1 @{
5445 global:
5446 foo1;
5447 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5448 old*;
5449 original*;
5450 new*;
252b5132
RH
5451@};
5452
5453VERS_1.2 @{
5454 foo2;
5455@} VERS_1.1;
5456
5457VERS_2.0 @{
5458 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5459 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5460 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5461 "f(int, double)";
5462 @};
252b5132
RH
5463@} VERS_1.2;
5464@end smallexample
5465
5466This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5467version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5468The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5469a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5470of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5471symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5472is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5473in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5474However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5475name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5476
5477Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5478depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5479to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5480
5481Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5482depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5483and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5484
5485When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5486specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5487unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5488unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5489somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5490wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5491wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5492set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5493ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5494
5495The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5496they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5497could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5498However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5499
0f6bf451 5500Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5501in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5502symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5503won't.
5504
5505@smallexample
7c9c73be 5506@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5507@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5508
252b5132
RH
5509When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5510symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5511requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5512shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5513loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5514linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5515application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5516way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5517all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5518search for each symbol reference.
5519
5520The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5521doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5522that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5523functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5524the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5525required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5526that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5527versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5528the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5529
5530There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5531first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5532source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5533script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5534maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5535@smallexample
5536__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5537@end smallexample
5538@noindent
5539in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5540be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5541The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5542@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5543takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5544
5545The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5546function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5547an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5548version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5549linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5550
5551To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5552source file. Here is an example:
5553
5554@smallexample
5555__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5556__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5557__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5558__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5559@end smallexample
5560
5561In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5562unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5563example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5564@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5565
5566When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5567some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5568this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5569@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5570declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5571you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5572
5573If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5574within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5575(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5576specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5577
cb840a31
L
5578You can also specify the language in the version script:
5579
5580@smallexample
5581VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5582@end smallexample
5583
c0065db7 5584The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5585The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5586demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5587patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5588@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5589
86043bbb
MM
5590Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5591described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5592or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5593the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5594whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5595cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5596might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5597should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5598expect when you upgrade.
5599
252b5132
RH
5600@node Expressions
5601@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5602@cindex expressions
5603@cindex arithmetic
5604The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5605that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5606expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5607host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5608
5609You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5610
5611The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5612expressions.
5613
5614@menu
5615* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5616* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5617* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5618* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5619* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5620* Operators:: Operators
5621* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5622* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5623* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5624@end menu
5625
5626@node Constants
5627@subsection Constants
5628@cindex integer notation
5629@cindex constants in linker scripts
5630All constants are integers.
5631
5632As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5633octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5634hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5635@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5636@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5637value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5638
5639@cindex scaled integers
5640@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5641@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5642@cindex suffixes for integers
5643@cindex integer suffixes
5644In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5645constant by
5646@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5647@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5648@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5649@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5650@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5651@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5652@tex
5653${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5654@end tex
5655@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5656respectively. For example, the following
5657all refer to the same quantity:
5658
252b5132 5659@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5660_fourk_1 = 4K;
5661_fourk_2 = 4096;
5662_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5663_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5664@end smallexample
5665
8a308ae8
NC
5666Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5667conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5668
0c71d759
NC
5669@node Symbolic Constants
5670@subsection Symbolic Constants
5671@cindex symbolic constants
5672@kindex CONSTANT
5673It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5674the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5675
5676@table @code
5677@item MAXPAGESIZE
5678@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5679The target's maximum page size.
5680
5681@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5682@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5683The target's default page size.
5684@end table
5685
5686So for example:
5687
5688@smallexample
9d5777a3 5689 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5690@end smallexample
5691
5692will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5693supported by the target.
5694
252b5132
RH
5695@node Symbols
5696@subsection Symbol Names
5697@cindex symbol names
5698@cindex names
5699@cindex quoted symbol names
5700@kindex "
5701Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5702and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5703Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5704specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5705keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5706@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5707"SECTION" = 9;
5708"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5709@end smallexample
5710
5711Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5712to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5713whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5714
ecca9871
L
5715@node Orphan Sections
5716@subsection Orphan Sections
5717@cindex orphan
5718Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5719are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5720script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5721output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5722placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5723attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5724same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5725If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5726at the end of the file.
5727
5728For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5729well as section flag.
5730
c005eb9e
AB
5731The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5732(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5733output sections an orphan is placed in.
5734
41911f68 5735If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5736the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5737__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5738section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5739orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5740representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5741character.
5742
252b5132
RH
5743@node Location Counter
5744@subsection The Location Counter
5745@kindex .
5746@cindex dot
5747@cindex location counter
5748@cindex current output location
5749The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5750current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5751location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5752within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5753anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5754
5755@cindex holes
5756Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5757moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5758location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5759and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5760doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5761
5762@smallexample
5763SECTIONS
5764@{
5765 output :
5766 @{
5767 file1(.text)
5768 . = . + 1000;
5769 file2(.text)
5770 . += 1000;
5771 file3(.text)
563e308f 5772 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5773@}
5774@end smallexample
5775@noindent
5776In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5777located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5778followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5779@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5780@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5781specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5782
5c6bbab8
NC
5783@cindex dot inside sections
5784Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5785current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5786statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5787absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5788however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5789not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5790
5791@smallexample
5792SECTIONS
5793@{
5794 . = 0x100
5795 .text: @{
5796 *(.text)
5797 . = 0x200
5798 @}
5799 . = 0x500
5800 .data: @{
5801 *(.data)
5802 . += 0x600
5803 @}
5804@}
5805@end smallexample
5806
5807The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5808and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5809the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5810much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5811move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5812and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5813the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5814the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5815
b5666f2f
AM
5816@cindex dot outside sections
5817Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5818output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5819needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5820
5821@smallexample
5822SECTIONS
5823@{
5824 start_of_text = . ;
5825 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5826 end_of_text = . ;
5827
5828 start_of_data = . ;
5829 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5830 end_of_data = . ;
5831@}
5832@end smallexample
5833
5834If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5835not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5836between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5837should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5838blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5839the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5840sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5841statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5842special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5843place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5844as follows:
5845
5846@smallexample
5847SECTIONS
5848@{
5849 start_of_text = . ;
5850 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5851 end_of_text = . ;
5852
5853 start_of_data = . ;
5854 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5855 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5856 end_of_data = . ;
5857@}
5858@end smallexample
5859
5860This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5861@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5862placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5863assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5864a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5865section. So you could write:
5866
5867@smallexample
5868SECTIONS
5869@{
5870 start_of_text = . ;
5871 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5872 end_of_text = . ;
5873
5874 . = . ;
5875 start_of_data = . ;
5876 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5877 end_of_data = . ;
5878@}
5879@end smallexample
5880
5881Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5882@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5883
252b5132
RH
5884@need 2000
5885@node Operators
5886@subsection Operators
5887@cindex operators for arithmetic
5888@cindex arithmetic operators
5889@cindex precedence in expressions
5890The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5891the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5892@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5893@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5894@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5895@smallexample
5896precedence associativity Operators Notes
5897(highest)
58981 left ! - ~ (1)
58992 left * / %
59003 left + -
59014 left >> <<
59025 left == != > < <= >=
59036 left &
59047 left |
59058 left &&
59069 left ||
590710 right ? :
590811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5909(lowest)
5910@end smallexample
5911Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5912(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5913(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5914@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5915@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5916@tex
5917\vskip \baselineskip
5918%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5919\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5920\hrule
5921\halign
5922{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5923height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5924&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5925height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5926\noalign{\hrule}
5927height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5928&highest&&&&&\cr
5929% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5930&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5931&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5932&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5933&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5934&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5935&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5936&7&&left&&|&\cr
5937&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5938&9&&left&&||&\cr
5939&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5940&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5941&lowest&&&&&\cr
5942height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5943\hrule}
5944@end tex
5945@iftex
5946{
5947@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5948@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5949@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5950}
5951@end iftex
5952@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5953
5954@node Evaluation
5955@subsection Evaluation
5956@cindex lazy evaluation
5957@cindex expression evaluation order
5958The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5959an expression when absolutely necessary.
5960
5961The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5962address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5963regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5964as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5965
5966However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5967until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5968other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5969for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5970
5971The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5972assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5973allocation.
5974
5975Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5976@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5977
5978If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5979available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5980following
5981@smallexample
5982@group
5983SECTIONS
5984 @{
a1ab1d2a 5985 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5986 @{ *(.text) @}
5987 @}
5988@end group
5989@end smallexample
5990@noindent
5991will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5992address}.
5993
5994@node Expression Section
5995@subsection The Section of an Expression
5996@cindex expression sections
5997@cindex absolute expressions
5998@cindex relative expressions
5999@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6000@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6001@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6002Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6003relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6004using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6005value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6006symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6007operations.
6008
abf4be64
AM
6009Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6010section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6011address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6012@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6013functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6014One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6015(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6016differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6017versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6018section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6019Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6020absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6021given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6022everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6023
6024In the following simple example,
252b5132 6025
7542af2a
AM
6026@smallexample
6027@group
6028SECTIONS
6029 @{
6030 . = 0x100;
6031 __executable_start = 0x100;
6032 .data :
6033 @{
6034 . = 0x10;
6035 __data_start = 0x10;
6036 *(.data)
6037 @}
6038 @dots{}
6039 @}
6040@end group
6041@end smallexample
252b5132 6042
7542af2a
AM
6043both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6044address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6045@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6046section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6047
5c3049d2
AM
6048For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6049addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6050
6051@itemize @bullet
6052@item
c05f749e
AM
6053Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6054operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6055absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6056@item
7542af2a
AM
6057Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6058relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6059and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6060@item
c05f749e
AM
6061Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6062in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6063address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6064before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6065@end itemize
6066
6067The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6068
6069@itemize @bullet
6070@item
6071An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6072@item
6073The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6074@item
9bc8bb33 6075The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6076relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6077(after above conversions) is also a number when
6078@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6079but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6080@item
6081The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6082relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6083section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6084@item
6085The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6086conversions) is an absolute address.
6087@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6088
6089You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6090to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6091create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6092section @samp{.data}:
6093@smallexample
6094SECTIONS
6095 @{
6096 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6097 @}
6098@end smallexample
6099@noindent
6100If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6101@samp{.data} section.
6102
7542af2a
AM
6103Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6104particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6105
252b5132
RH
6106@node Builtin Functions
6107@subsection Builtin Functions
6108@cindex functions in expressions
6109The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6110use in linker script expressions.
6111
6112@table @code
6113@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6114@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6115@cindex expression, absolute
6116Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6117of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6118value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6119normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6120
6121@item ADDR(@var{section})
6122@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6123@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6124Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6125script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6126the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6127@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6128@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6129the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6130@smallexample
6131@group
6132SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6133 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6134 @{
252b5132
RH
6135 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6136 @dots{}
6137 @}
6138 .output :
6139 @{
6140 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6141 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6142 @}
6143@dots{} @}
6144@end group
6145@end smallexample
6146
876f4090
NS
6147@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6148@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6149@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6150@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6151@cindex round up location counter
6152@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6153@cindex round up expression
6154@cindex align expression
6155Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6156to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6157doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6158arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6159expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6160equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6161
6162Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6163next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6164variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6165input sections:
252b5132
RH
6166@smallexample
6167@group
6168SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6169 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6170 *(.data)
6171 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6172 @}
6173@dots{} @}
6174@end group
6175@end smallexample
6176@noindent
6177The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6178a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6179a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6180of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6181
6182The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6183
362c1d1a
NS
6184@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6185@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6186@cindex section alignment
6187Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6188been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6189evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6190the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6191value in that section.
6192@smallexample
6193@group
6194SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6195 .output @{
6196 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6197 @dots{}
6198 @}
6199@dots{} @}
6200@end group
6201@end smallexample
6202
252b5132
RH
6203@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6204@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6205This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6206scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6207section.
6208
2d20f7bf
JJ
6209@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6210@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6211This is equivalent to either
6212@smallexample
6213(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6214@end smallexample
6215or
6216@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6217(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6218 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6219@end smallexample
6220@noindent
6221depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6222for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6223@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6224If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6225memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6226bytes in the on-disk file.
6227
6228This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6229any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6230@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6231be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6232working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6233
6234@noindent
6235Example:
6236@smallexample
6237 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6238@end smallexample
6239
6240@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6241@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6242This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6243evaluation purposes.
6244
6245@smallexample
6246 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6247@end smallexample
6248
a4f5ad88
JJ
6249@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6250@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6251This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6252@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6253When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6254does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6255@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6256boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6257it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6258@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6259padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6260section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6261
6262@smallexample
6263 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6264@end smallexample
6265
252b5132
RH
6266@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6267@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6268@cindex symbol defaults
6269Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6270defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6271return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6272default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6273shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6274the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6275existed, its value is preserved:
6276
6277@smallexample
6278@group
6279SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6280 .text : @{
6281 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6282 @dots{}
6283 @}
6284 @dots{}
6285@}
6286@end group
6287@end smallexample
6288
3ec57632
NC
6289@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6290@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6291Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6292
252b5132
RH
6293@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6294@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6295@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6296Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6297Section LMA}).
6298
2e53f7d6
NC
6299@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6300@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6301Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6302@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6303
252b5132
RH
6304@kindex MAX
6305@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6306Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6307
6308@kindex MIN
6309@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6310Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6311
6312@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6313@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6314@cindex unallocated address, next
6315Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6316This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6317use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6318output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6319
3ec57632
NC
6320@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6321@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6322Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6323
ba916c8a
MM
6324@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6325@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6326Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6327value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6328@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6329will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6330can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6331``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6332name.
6333
252b5132
RH
6334@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6335@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6336@cindex section size
6337Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6338been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6339evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6340@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6341@smallexample
6342@group
6343SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6344 .output @{
6345 .start = . ;
6346 @dots{}
6347 .end = . ;
6348 @}
6349 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6350 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6351@dots{} @}
6352@end group
6353@end smallexample
6354
6355@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6356@itemx sizeof_headers
6357@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6358@cindex header size
6359Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6360information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6361this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6362choose, to facilitate paging.
6363
6364@cindex not enough room for program headers
6365@cindex program headers, not enough room
6366When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6367@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6368number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6369addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6370additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6371room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6372the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6373script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6374you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6375command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6376@end table
6377
6378@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6379@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6380@cindex implicit linker scripts
6381If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6382an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6383linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6384linker will report an error.
6385
6386An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6387
6388Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6389assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6390commands.
6391
6392Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6393at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6394read. This can affect archive searching.
6395
6396@ifset GENERIC
6397@node Machine Dependent
6398@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6399
6400@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6401@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6402sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6403functionality are not listed.
6404
6405@menu
36f63dca
NC
6406@ifset H8300
6407* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6408@end ifset
6409@ifset I960
6410* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6411@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6412@ifset M68HC11
6413* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6414@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6415@ifset ARM
6416* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6417@end ifset
6418@ifset HPPA
6419* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6420@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6421@ifset M68K
6422* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6423@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6424@ifset MIPS
6425* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6426@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6427@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6428* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6429@end ifset
2469cfa2 6430@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6431* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6432@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6433@ifset NDS32
6434* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6435@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6436@ifset NIOSII
6437* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6438@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6439@ifset POWERPC
6440* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6441@end ifset
6442@ifset POWERPC64
6443* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6444@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6445@ifset SPU
6446* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6447@end ifset
74459f0e 6448@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6449* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6450@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6451@ifset WIN32
6452* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6453@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6454@ifset XTENSA
6455* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6456@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6457@end menu
6458@end ifset
6459
252b5132
RH
6460@ifset H8300
6461@ifclear GENERIC
6462@raisesections
6463@end ifclear
6464
6465@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6466@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6467
6468@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6469For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6470you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6471
6472@table @emph
6473@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6474@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6475@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6476targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6477program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6478respectively.
6479
6480@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6481@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6482@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6483@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6484sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6485page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6486(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6487@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6488top page of memory).
1502569c 6489
81f5558e
NC
6490@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6491indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6492displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6493the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6494@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6495whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6496range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6497
1502569c 6498@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6499@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6500biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6501which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6502page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6503(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6504@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6505the top page of memory).
6506
6507@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6508@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
650932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6510changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6511(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6512@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6513the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6514@end table
6515
6516@ifclear GENERIC
6517@lowersections
6518@end ifclear
6519@end ifset
6520
36f63dca 6521@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6522@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6523@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6524@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6525@node Renesas
6526@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6527
c2dcd04e
NC
6528@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6529H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6530options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6531@end ifset
6532@end ifclear
6533
6534@ifset I960
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@raisesections
6537@end ifclear
6538
6539@node i960
6540@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6541
6542@cindex i960 support
6543
6544You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6545specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6546family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6547incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6548linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6549libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6550search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6551
6552For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6553well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6554paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6555the names
6556
6557@smallexample
6558@group
6559try
6560libtry.a
6561tryca
6562libtryca.a
6563@end group
6564@end smallexample
6565
6566@noindent
6567The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6568two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6569
6570You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6571the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6572use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6573specifies a library.
6574
6575@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6576@cindex relaxing on i960
6577@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6578you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6579@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6580them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6581instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6582instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6583target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6584not itself call any subroutines).
6585
6586@ifclear GENERIC
6587@lowersections
6588@end ifclear
6589@end ifset
6590
6591@ifset ARM
6592@ifclear GENERIC
6593@raisesections
6594@end ifclear
6595
93fd0973
SC
6596@ifset M68HC11
6597@ifclear GENERIC
6598@raisesections
6599@end ifclear
6600
6601@node M68HC11/68HC12
6602@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6603
6604@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6605
6606@subsection Linker Relaxation
6607
6608For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6609optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6610
6611@table @emph
6612@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6613@item relaxing address modes
6614@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6615targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6616program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6617respectively.
6618
6619@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6620transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6621page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6622
6623@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6624When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6625of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6626addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6627@code{bset} instructions.
6628
6629@end table
6630
6631@subsection Trampoline Generation
6632
6633@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6634@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6635For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6636call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6637will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6638trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6639case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6640point to the function trampoline.
6641
6642@ifclear GENERIC
6643@lowersections
6644@end ifclear
6645@end ifset
6646
36f63dca 6647@node ARM
3674e28a 6648@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6649
6650@cindex ARM interworking support
6651@kindex --support-old-code
6652For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6653between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6654been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6655line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6656libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6657option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6658given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6659which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6660the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6661non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6662
6663@cindex thumb entry point
6664@cindex entry point, thumb
6665@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6666The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6667@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6668But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6669branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6670executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6671
ce11ba6c
KT
6672@cindex PE import table prefixing
6673@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6674The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6675the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6676element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6677import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6678
e489d0ae
PB
6679@cindex BE8
6680@kindex --be8
6681The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6682executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6683objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6684option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6685little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6686
3674e28a
PB
6687@cindex TARGET1
6688@kindex --target1-rel
6689@kindex --target1-abs
6690The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6691@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6692or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6693and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6694
6695@cindex TARGET2
6696@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6697The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6698@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6699meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6700@table @samp
6701@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6702@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6703@item abs
6704@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6705@item got-rel
6706@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6707@end table
6708
319850b4
JB
6709@cindex FIX_V4BX
6710@kindex --fix-v4bx
6711The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6712specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6713interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6714also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6715
6716In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6717linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6718@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6719
6720In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6721relocations are ignored.
6722
845b51d6
PB
6723@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6724@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6725Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6726relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6727
6728@smallexample
6729TST rM, #1
6730MOVEQ PC, rM
6731BX Rn
6732@end smallexample
6733
6734This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6735and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6736condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6737
33bfe774
JB
6738@cindex USE_BLX
6739@kindex --use-blx
6740The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6741BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6742situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6743code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6744each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6745
6746This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6747specify it if you are using that target.
6748
c6dd86c6
JB
6749@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6750@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6751The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6752bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6753instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6754to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6755the support code can read the intended values.
6756
6757The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6758intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6759and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6760intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6761full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6762you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6763
6764If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6765enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6766@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6767mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6768vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6769@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6770
6771If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6772potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6773such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6774first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6775instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6776the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6777are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6778
2de70689
MGD
6779@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6780@kindex --fix-arm1176
6781@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6782The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6783in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6784are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6785unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6786
9d5777a3 6787Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6788Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6789http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6790
a504d23a
LA
6791@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6792@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6793
6794The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6795workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6796the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6797off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6798the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6799core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6800integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6801VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6802
6803The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6804necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6805
6806The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6807@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6808STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6809linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6810@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6811
6812If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6813potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6814such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6815replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6816branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6817then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6818
6819The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6820the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6821
6822The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6823they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6824there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6825occurs.
6826
6827The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6828PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6829large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6830cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6831occurs.
6832
bf21ed78
MS
6833@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6834@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6835The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6836warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6837enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6838linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6839using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6840not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6841
6842@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6843@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6844The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6845warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6846@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6847linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6848using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6849
726150b7
NC
6850@cindex PIC_VENEER
6851@kindex --pic-veneer
6852The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6853ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6854is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6855@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6856
6857@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6858@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6859The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6860code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6861perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6862placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6863controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6864The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6865duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6866group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6867code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6868where they should be placed.
6869
6870The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6871@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6872placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6873branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6874placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6875value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6876exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6877A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6878linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6879from the input sections.
6880
6881The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6882@samp{N = +1}.
6883
1a51c1a4
NC
6884Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6885only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6886otherwise.
6887
1db37fe6
YG
6888@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6889@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6890@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6891The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6892
6893The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6894
68fcca92
JW
6895@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6896@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6897@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6898The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6899
6900Please contact ARM for further details.
6901
1db37fe6
YG
6902@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6903@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6904@cindex Merging exidx entries
6905The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6906
6907@kindex --long-plt
6908@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6909The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6910which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6911entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6912
1f56df9d
JW
6913@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6914@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6915The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6916link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6917
4ba2ef8f
TP
6918@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6919All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6920Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6921@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6922veneers in memory.
6923
54ddd295
TP
6924@kindex --cmse-implib
6925@cindex Secure gateway import library
6926The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6927specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6928secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6929executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6930
0955507f
TP
6931@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6932@cindex Input import library
6933The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6934must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6935given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6936in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6937@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6938library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6939library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6940for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6941specified.
6942
36f63dca
NC
6943@ifclear GENERIC
6944@lowersections
6945@end ifclear
6946@end ifset
6947
6948@ifset HPPA
6949@ifclear GENERIC
6950@raisesections
6951@end ifclear
6952
6953@node HPPA ELF32
6954@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6955@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6956@kindex --multi-subspace
6957When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6958import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6959The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6960stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6961multiple sub-spaces.
6962
6963@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6964@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6965Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6966stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6967@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6968sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6969a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6970the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6971conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6972prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6973A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6974branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6975@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6976@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6977detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6978positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6979
6980Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6981single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6982create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6983large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6984
6985@ifclear GENERIC
6986@lowersections
6987@end ifclear
6988@end ifset
6989
7fb9f789
NC
6990@ifset M68K
6991@ifclear GENERIC
6992@raisesections
6993@end ifclear
6994
6995@node M68K
6996@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6997
6998@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6999@kindex --got=@var{type}
7000The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7001The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7002@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7003the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7004@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7005entries only at non-negative offsets.
7006@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7007entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7008support such GOTs.
7009@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7010output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7011file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7012files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7013
7014@ifclear GENERIC
7015@lowersections
7016@end ifclear
7017@end ifset
7018
833794fc
MR
7019@ifset MIPS
7020@ifclear GENERIC
7021@raisesections
7022@end ifclear
7023
7024@node MIPS
7025@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7026
7027@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7028@kindex --insn32
7029@kindex --no-insn32
7030The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7031microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7032in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7033used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7034or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7035including 16-bit ones where possible.
7036
7037@ifclear GENERIC
7038@lowersections
7039@end ifclear
7040@end ifset
7041
36f63dca
NC
7042@ifset MMIX
7043@ifclear GENERIC
7044@raisesections
7045@end ifclear
7046
7047@node MMIX
7048@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7049For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7050@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7051understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7052can translate between the two formats.
7053
7054There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7055Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7056registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7057equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7058@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7059global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7060this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7061symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7062
7a2de473
HPN
7063Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7064@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7065The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7066of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7067
7068Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7069are left out from an mmo file.
7070
7071@ifclear GENERIC
7072@lowersections
7073@end ifclear
7074@end ifset
7075
7076@ifset MSP430
7077@ifclear GENERIC
7078@raisesections
7079@end ifclear
7080
7081@node MSP430
7082@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7083For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7084will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7085just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7086
7087@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7088The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7089
7090@table @code
7091@item @samp{.vectors}
7092Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7093
7094@item @samp{.bootloader}
7095Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7096in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7097
7098@item @samp{.infomem}
7099Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7100this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7101
c0065db7 7102@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7103This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7104in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7105
7106@item @samp{.noinit}
7107Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7108
c0065db7 7109The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7110@end table
7111
7112@ifclear GENERIC
7113@lowersections
7114@end ifclear
7115@end ifset
7116
35c08157
KLC
7117@ifset NDS32
7118@ifclear GENERIC
7119@raisesections
7120@end ifclear
7121
7122@node NDS32
7123@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7124@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7125For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7126relaxes objects according to these options.
7127
7128@table @code
7129@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7130Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7131
7132@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7133Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7134
7135@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7136Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7137
7138@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7139Export the EX9 table after linking.
7140
7141@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7142Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7143
7144@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7145Update the existing EX9 table.
7146
7147@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7148Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7149
7150@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7151Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7152
7153@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7154Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7155
7156@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7157Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7158@end table
7159
7160@ifclear GENERIC
7161@lowersections
7162@end ifclear
7163@end ifset
7164
78058a5e
SL
7165@ifset NIOSII
7166@ifclear GENERIC
7167@raisesections
7168@end ifclear
7169
7170@node Nios II
7171@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7172@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7173@kindex --relax on Nios II
7174
7175Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7176transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7177which may result in @command{ld} giving
7178@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7179The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7180trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7181outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7182trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7183be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7184larger than 256MB.
7185
7186The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7187is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7188@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7189locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7190source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7191register as a temporary.
7192
7193Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7194relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7195option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7196
7197@ifclear GENERIC
7198@lowersections
7199@end ifclear
7200@end ifset
7201
2a60a7a8
AM
7202@ifset POWERPC
7203@ifclear GENERIC
7204@raisesections
7205@end ifclear
7206
7207@node PowerPC ELF32
7208@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7209@cindex PowerPC long branches
7210@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7211Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7212displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7213@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7214@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7215the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7216section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7217section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7218@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7219both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7220considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7221
7222@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7223@table @option
7224@cindex PowerPC PLT
7225@kindex --bss-plt
7226@item --bss-plt
7227Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7228generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7229the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7230writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7231@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7232PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7233compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7234BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7235
016687f8
AM
7236@kindex --secure-plt
7237@item --secure-plt
7238@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7239@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7240when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7241layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7242style BSS PLT.
7243
2a60a7a8
AM
7244@cindex PowerPC GOT
7245@kindex --sdata-got
7246@item --sdata-got
7247The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7248sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7249@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7250section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7251@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7252@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7253@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7254@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7255PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7256pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7257GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7258really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7259
7260@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7261@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7262@item --emit-stub-syms
7263This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7264symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7265
7266@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7267@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7268@item --no-tls-optimize
7269PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7270sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7271disable the optimization.
7272@end table
7273
7274@ifclear GENERIC
7275@lowersections
7276@end ifclear
7277@end ifset
7278
7279@ifset POWERPC64
7280@ifclear GENERIC
7281@raisesections
7282@end ifclear
7283
7284@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7285@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7286
7287@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7288@table @option
7289@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7290@kindex --stub-group-size
7291@item --stub-group-size
7292Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7293by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7294@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7295sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7296a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7297the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7298conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7299prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7300A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7301branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7302@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7303@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7304detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7305positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7306
7307Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7308single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7309create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7310large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7311
7312@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7313@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7314@item --emit-stub-syms
7315This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7316symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7317
7318@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7319@kindex --dotsyms
7320@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7321@item --dotsyms
7322@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7323These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7324in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7325function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7326code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7327properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7328to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7329@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7330dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7331feature.
7332
7ae4ea7d
AM
7333@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7334@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7335@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7336@item --save-restore-funcs
7337@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7338These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7339provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7340@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7341function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7342link.
7343
2a60a7a8
AM
7344@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7345@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7346@item --no-tls-optimize
7347PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7348sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7349disable the optimization.
7350
7c9cf415
AM
7351@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7352@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7353@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7354@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7355@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7356These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7357stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7358an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7359@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7360stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7361option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7362Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7363slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7364application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7365normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7366
2a60a7a8
AM
7367@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7368@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7369@item --no-opd-optimize
7370PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7371corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7372the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7373Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7374
7375@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7376@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7377@item --non-overlapping-opd
7378Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7379@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7380the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7381entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7382
7383@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7384@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7385@item --no-toc-optimize
7386PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7387entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7388reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7389marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7390marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7391relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7392unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7393reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7394discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7395reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7396code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7397optimization.
7398
7399@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7400@kindex --no-multi-toc
7401@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7402If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7403@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7404where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7405entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7406total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7407grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7408TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7409calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7410help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
741164K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7412Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7413
7414@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7415@kindex --no-toc-sort
7416@item --no-toc-sort
7417By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7418happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7419placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7420with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7421referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7422@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7423results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7424off this feature.
7425
7426@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7427@kindex --plt-align
7428@kindex --no-plt-align
7429@item --plt-align
7430@itemx --no-plt-align
7431Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7432padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7433specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7434that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7435stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7436
7437@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7438@kindex --plt-static-chain
7439@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7440@item --plt-static-chain
7441@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7442Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7443chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7444chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7445
7446@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7447@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7448@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7449@item --plt-thread-safe
7450@itemx --no-thread-safe
7451With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7452lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7453another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7454order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7455memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7456barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7457looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7458seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7459default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7460@end table
7461
7462@ifclear GENERIC
7463@lowersections
7464@end ifclear
7465@end ifset
7466
49fa1e15
AM
7467@ifset SPU
7468@ifclear GENERIC
7469@raisesections
7470@end ifclear
7471
7472@node SPU ELF
7473@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7474
7475@cindex SPU ELF options
7476@table @option
7477
7478@cindex SPU plugins
7479@kindex --plugin
7480@item --plugin
7481This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7482
7483@cindex SPU overlays
7484@kindex --no-overlays
7485@item --no-overlays
7486Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7487regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7488@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7489turns off all this special overlay handling.
7490
7491@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7492@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7493@item --emit-stub-syms
7494This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7495symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7496
7497@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7498@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7499@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7500This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7501function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7502on calls to non-overlay regions.
7503
7504@cindex SPU local store size
7505@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7506@item --local-store=lo:hi
7507@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7508the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7509range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7510
c0065db7 7511@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7512@kindex --stack-analysis
7513@item --stack-analysis
7514SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7515unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7516under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7517@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7518@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7519determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7520for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7521for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7522for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7523find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7524and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7525under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7526dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7527is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7528and calls will be given.
7529
c0065db7 7530@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7531@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7532@item --emit-stack-syms
7533This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7534in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7535These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7536functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7537functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7538such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7539The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7540@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7541@end table
7542
7543@ifclear GENERIC
7544@lowersections
7545@end ifclear
7546@end ifset
7547
36f63dca
NC
7548@ifset TICOFF
7549@ifclear GENERIC
7550@raisesections
7551@end ifclear
7552
7553@node TI COFF
7554@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7555@cindex TI COFF versions
7556@kindex --format=@var{version}
7557The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7558TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7559also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7560format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7561header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7562
7563@ifclear GENERIC
7564@lowersections
7565@end ifclear
7566@end ifset
7567
2ca22b03
NC
7568@ifset WIN32
7569@ifclear GENERIC
7570@raisesections
7571@end ifclear
7572
7573@node WIN32
7574@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7575
c0065db7 7576This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7577See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7578command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7579
7580@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7581@cindex import libraries
7582@item import libraries
69da35b5 7583The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7584libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7585regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7586archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7587support for creating such libraries provided with the
7588@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7589
c0065db7
RM
7590@item exporting DLL symbols
7591@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7592The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7593
7594@table @emph
7595@item using auto-export functionality
7596@cindex using auto-export functionality
7597By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7598which is controlled by the following command line options:
7599
0a5d968e
NC
7600@itemize
7601@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7602@item --exclude-symbols
7603@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7604@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7605@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7606@end itemize
7607
09e2aba4
DK
7608When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7609(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7610symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7611often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7612private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7613options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7614exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7615final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7616
7617If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7618command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7619if either of the following are true:
7620
7621@itemize
7622@item A DEF file is used.
7623@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7624@end itemize
dc8465bf 7625
c0065db7
RM
7626@item using a DEF file
7627@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7628Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7629an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7630exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7631name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7632command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7633
7634@example
7635gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7636@end example
7637
0a5d968e
NC
7638Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7639@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7640
dc8465bf
NC
7641Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7642
7643@example
4b5bd4e7 7644LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7645
7646EXPORTS
7647foo
7648bar
7649_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7650another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7651var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7652doo = foo == foo2
7653eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7654@end example
dc8465bf 7655
7fcab871 7656This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7657symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7658alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7659by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7660@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7661@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7662export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7663in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7664symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7665
6b31ad16
DS
7666The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7667name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7668the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7669
b45619c0
NC
7670When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7671library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7672@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7673executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7674
7675With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7676specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7677non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7678
7679If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7680or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7681filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7682
4b5bd4e7
DS
7683The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7684
7685@example
7686EXPORTS
7687 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7688 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7689 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7690@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7691
7692Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7693@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7694@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7695@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7696Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7697@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7698string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7699
7700The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7701
7702@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7703will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7704by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7705linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7706library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7707
7708@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7709The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7710the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7711@code{*_imp__foo}).
7712
7713@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7714well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7715read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7716variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7717the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7718extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7719application will behave unexpectedly.
7720
7721@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7722it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7723symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7724API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7725the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7726
4b5bd4e7
DS
7727See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7728other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7729
7730@cindex creating a DEF file
7731While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7732with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7733
7734@item Using decorations
7735@cindex Using decorations
7736Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7737itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7738declared as:
7739
7740@example
7741__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7742__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7743@end example
7744
7745All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7746any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7747this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7748the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7749
7750Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7751decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7752instead:
7753
7754@example
7755__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7756__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7757@end example
7758
c0065db7
RM
7759This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7760when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7761variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7762code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7763of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7764omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7765@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7766information.
c0065db7 7767@end table
dc8465bf 7768
2ca22b03
NC
7769@cindex automatic data imports
7770@item automatic data imports
7771The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7772by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7773compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7774issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7775code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7776c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7777initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7778decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7779platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7780command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7781The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7782suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7783trigger the feature's use.
7784
c0065db7 7785auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7786additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7787
c0065db7 7788"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7789documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7790
c0065db7
RM
7791The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7792occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7793One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7794below.
7795
7796@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7797For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7798object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7799offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7800field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7801in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7802without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7803The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7804references.
7805
c0065db7
RM
7806The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7807be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7808themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7809runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7810compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7811support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7812run without error on an older system.
7813
c0065db7
RM
7814@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7815enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7816
7817@cindex direct linking to a dll
7818@item direct linking to a dll
7819The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7820including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7821libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7822traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7823libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7824function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7825though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7826storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7827tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7828large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7829
c0065db7 7830Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7831@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7832of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7833perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7834select the dll instead of an import library.
7835
2ca22b03 7836
69da35b5
NC
7837For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7838to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7839
7840@example
45e948fe
NC
7841libxxx.dll.a
7842xxx.dll.a
7843libxxx.a
7844xxx.lib
69da35b5 7845cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7846libxxx.dll
7847xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7848@end example
7849
69da35b5
NC
7850before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7851
c0065db7
RM
7852(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7853where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7854@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7855file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7856@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7857
c0065db7
RM
7858Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7859@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7860was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7861various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7862could coexist on the same machine.
7863
2ca22b03
NC
7864The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7865applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7866libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7867
7868@example
7869bin/
7870 cygxxx.dll
7871lib/
7872 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7873 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7874@end example
7875
c0065db7
RM
7876Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7877done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7878
78791. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7880@example
7881gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7882@end example
2ca22b03 7883
69da35b5
NC
7884However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7885(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7886@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7887not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7888
2ca22b03
NC
78892. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7890directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7891should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7892making the app/dll.
7893
7894@example
7895ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7896@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7897
7898Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7899
7900@example
7901gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7902@end example
69da35b5
NC
7903
7904This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7905perfectly legal
7906
7907@example
7908bin/
7909 cygxxx-5.dll
7910lib/
c0065db7 7911 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7912@end example
7913
dc8465bf 7914Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7915even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7916@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7917
7918Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7919wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7920
79211. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7922work with auto-imported data.
7923
dc8465bf
NC
79242. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7925import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7926symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7927for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7928possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7929
45e948fe
NC
79303. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7931critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7932in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7933stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7934
69da35b5 7935So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7936true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7937a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7938binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7939massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7940requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7941will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7942
c0065db7 7943@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7944@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7945@item adding additional names
7946Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7947A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7948exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7949when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7950import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7951
c0065db7 7952@example
dc8465bf
NC
7953LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7954
7955EXPORTS
c0065db7 7956foo
dc8465bf 7957_foo = foo
c0065db7 7958@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7959
7960The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7961
7962Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7963source code using the "weak" attribute:
7964
c0065db7
RM
7965@example
7966void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7967void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7968@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7969
7970See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7971symbols.
7972
7973@item renaming symbols
7974Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7975kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7976@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7977DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7978created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7979
c0065db7 7980@example
dc8465bf
NC
7981LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7982
7983EXPORTS
7984_foo = foo
c0065db7 7985@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7986
7987The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7988@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7989@end table
dc8465bf 7990
0a5d968e 7991Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7992unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7993If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7994@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7995that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7996@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7997renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7998to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7999the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8000In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8001which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8002
8003@cindex weak externals
8004@item weak externals
8005The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8006weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8007defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8008are three variants of weak externals:
8009@itemize
8010@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8011called lazy externals.
8012@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8013This form is not presently implemented.
8014@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8015implemented.
8016@end itemize
8017As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8018are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8019uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8020
8021@cindex aligned common symbols
8022@item aligned common symbols
8023As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8024desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8025the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8026carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8027by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8028tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8029but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8030warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8031
2ca22b03
NC
8032@end table
8033
8034@ifclear GENERIC
8035@lowersections
8036@end ifclear
8037@end ifset
8038
e0001a05
NC
8039@ifset XTENSA
8040@ifclear GENERIC
8041@raisesections
8042@end ifclear
8043
8044@node Xtensa
8045@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8046
8047@cindex Xtensa processors
8048The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8049@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8050specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8051keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8052example, with the command:
8053
8054@smallexample
8055SECTIONS
8056@{
8057 .text : @{
8058 *(.literal .text)
8059 @}
8060@}
8061@end smallexample
8062
8063@noindent
8064@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8065and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8066literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8067interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8068group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8069files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8070and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8071
43cd72b9 8072@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8073@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8074Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8075provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8076is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8077literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8078will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8079location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8080the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8081unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8082@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8083range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8084
8085For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8086to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8087instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8088instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8089instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8090@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8091hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8092By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8093switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8094density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8095instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8096performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8097linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8098a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8099
8100The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8101control the linker:
8102
8103@cindex Xtensa options
8104@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8105@item --size-opt
8106When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8107more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8108no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8109alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8110preserve the correctness of the code.
8111@end table
e0001a05
NC
8112
8113@ifclear GENERIC
8114@lowersections
8115@end ifclear
8116@end ifset
8117
252b5132
RH
8118@ifclear SingleFormat
8119@node BFD
8120@chapter BFD
8121
8122@cindex back end
8123@cindex object file management
8124@cindex object formats available
8125@kindex objdump -i
8126The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8127These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8128object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8129format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8130it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8131associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8132object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8133(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8134list all the formats available for your configuration.
8135
8136@cindex BFD requirements
8137@cindex requirements for BFD
8138As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8139several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8140BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8141formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8142been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8143BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8144may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8145
8146One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8147mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8148useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8149conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8150
8151@menu
8152* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8153@end menu
8154
8155@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8156@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8157@cindex opening object files
8158@include bfdsumm.texi
8159@end ifclear
8160
8161@node Reporting Bugs
8162@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8163@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8164@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8165
ff5dcc92 8166Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8167
8168Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8169it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8170to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8171work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8172@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8173
8174In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8175information that enables us to fix the bug.
8176
8177@menu
8178* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8179* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8180@end menu
8181
8182@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8183@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8184@cindex bug criteria
8185
8186If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8187
8188@itemize @bullet
8189@cindex fatal signal
8190@cindex linker crash
8191@cindex crash of linker
8192@item
8193If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8194@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8195
8196@cindex error on valid input
8197@item
ff5dcc92 8198If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8199
8200@cindex invalid input
8201@item
ff5dcc92 8202If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8203may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8204object files are correct.
8205
8206@item
8207If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8208improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8209@end itemize
8210
8211@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8212@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8213@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8214@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8215
8216A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8217products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8218recommend you contact that organization first.
8219
8220You can find contact information for many support companies and
8221individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8222distribution.
8223
ad22bfe8 8224@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8225Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8226@value{BUGURL}.
8227@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8228
8229The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8230@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8231fact or leave it out, state it!
8232
8233Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8234problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8235assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8236matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8237the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8238location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8239were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8240into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8241specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8242and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8243
8244Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8245the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8246on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8247
8248Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8249bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8250respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8251You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8252
8253To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8254
8255@itemize @bullet
8256@item
ff5dcc92 8257The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8258the @samp{--version} argument.
8259
8260Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8261the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8262
8263@item
ff5dcc92 8264Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8265patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8266
8267@item
8268The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8269version number.
8270
8271@item
ff5dcc92 8272What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8273``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8274
8275@item
8276The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8277observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8278list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8279sufficient.
8280
8281If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8282and then we might not encounter the bug.
8283
8284@item
8285A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8286bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8287provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8288bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8289state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8290requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8291we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8292attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8293
8294If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8295@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8296object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8297@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8298how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8299
8300@item
8301A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8302incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8303
ff5dcc92 8304Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8305will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8306not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8307a chance to make a mistake.
8308
8309Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8310say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8311copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8312C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8313and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8314fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8315you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8316any conclusion from our observations.
8317
8318@item
ff5dcc92 8319If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8320diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8321@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8322If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8323context, not by line number.
8324
8325The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8326sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8327@end itemize
8328
8329Here are some things that are not necessary:
8330
8331@itemize @bullet
8332@item
8333A description of the envelope of the bug.
8334
8335Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8336which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8337changes will not affect it.
8338
8339This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8340will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8341with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8342We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8343
8344Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8345of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8346output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8347less time, and so on.
8348
8349However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8350report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8351
8352@item
8353A patch for the bug.
8354
8355A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8356the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8357a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8358to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8359
ff5dcc92 8360Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8361construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8362through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8363able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8364fixed.
8365
8366And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8367patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8368help us to understand.
8369
8370@item
8371A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8372
8373Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8374things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8375@end itemize
8376
8377@node MRI
8378@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8379@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8380To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8381linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8382alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8383described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8384simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8385@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8386linker commands; these commands are described here.
8387
8388In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8389file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8390features to make use of them.
8391
8392You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8393@samp{-c} command-line option.
8394
8395Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8396command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8397blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8398MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8399issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8400
8401Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8402
8403You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8404lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8405The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8406
8407@table @code
8408@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8409@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8410@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8411Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8412the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8413@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8414your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8415script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8416commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8417input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8418@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8419
8420@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8421@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8422Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8423in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8424
8425@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8426
8427@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8428@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8429Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8430@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8431
8432@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8433@item BASE @var{expression}
8434Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8435absolute addresses) in the output file.
8436
8437@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8438@item CHIP @var{expression}
8439@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8440This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8441
8442@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8443@item END
8444This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8445
8446@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8447@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8448Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8449language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8450
8451@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8452@item
252b5132
RH
8453S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8454
8455@item
8456IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8457
8458@item
8459COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8460@samp{COFF}
8461@end enumerate
8462
8463@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8464@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8465Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8466@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8467
8468The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8469same line, with no change in its effect.
8470
8471@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8472@item LOAD @var{filename}
8473@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8474Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8475same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8476command line.
8477
8478@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8479@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8480@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8481MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8482option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8483
8484@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8485@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8486@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8487Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8488order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8489script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8490sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8491file, in the order specified.
8492
8493@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8494@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8495@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8496@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8497Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8498@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8499
8500@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8501@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8502@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8503@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8504You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8505specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8506If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8507@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8508@end table
8509
793c5807
NC
8510@node GNU Free Documentation License
8511@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8512@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8513
370b66a1
CD
8514@node LD Index
8515@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8516
8517@printindex cp
8518
8519@tex
7ca01ed9 8520% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8521% meantime:
8522\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8523\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8524\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8525\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8526\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8527\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8528\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8529\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8530\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8531% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8532@end tex
8533
252b5132 8534@bye